ELMARK katalógus by WebLampa

ELMARK Has been a registered trademark for Europe since the year of 2000 and is part of the international company ELMARK HOLDING SC. Our company is licensed for the manufacture of the full range of professional low-voltage electrical equipment. The Headquarters of ELMARK HOLDING AD are situated in Varna, Bulgaria. There is our logistics center which coordinates our activities in Europe and worldwide. As a member-company of our holding, ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC is controlling the production, while ELMARK GROUP BULGARIA LTD, ELMARK GRUP SRL-Romania, ELMARK GROUP DOO â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Serbia, ELMARK GROUP DOO â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Croatia, manage our trade activities in the respective countries. Our plant in Europe is situated in Bulgaria on an area of 10 000 sq.m. In its warehouse we keep on hand large quantities of all products, presented in the technical catalogue. Right from here we distribute the goods for Europe and worldwide. There is and adjacent modern warehouse building, covering 5000 sq.m., which enables us to keep large stocks to better meet the demands of our multiple clients. The management and the quality control of the products we produce are guaranteed by the ISO 9001:2000 certificates, complete Test for certificates for CE marking in accordance with Directive 73/23 EEC and ROHS (Restriction of hazardous Substances) certificates which guarantee the absence of any substances hazardous to the people and the environment. The full three - year warranty period is an additional proof of the quality of the ELMARK products. It is further accompanied by a special international insurance, which guarantees the coverage of damages which may occur as a result from an action or inaction of our products. ELMARK HOLDING AD is represented by distributing companies in Greece, Cyprus, Hungary, Macedonia, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Montenegro, Sri Lanka, Israel and Jordan. We are near to finalize our contract negotiations with distributors from Kuwait. Our successful trade policy is due to the high quality of the ELMARK product range and the successful balance of supply and demand of electrical equipment on competitive prices. As a result, ELMARK HOLDING SC has been a trustworthy and desired partner on the European and world market for eight years.

CONTENTS

www.elmarkgroup.eu

CERTIFICATES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 А1 А1 А1 А1 A1 А1 А1 А1 А2 А2 А2 А3 А3 А3 А4 А5 А6

CIRCUIT BREAKERS Miniature circuit breakers C45, C60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N - SIGMA design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) С60N - OMEGA design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100L - SIGMA design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60DC series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) DP1N (1P + N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Switch disconnectors ISS 63…100A series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Isolating switches ISS2 125…800A series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Manual switching to reserve series EQ 2M from 125 to 800А . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 High capacity circuit breakers DS1 to 1600A – electronic type (MCCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS2 series 63…1250A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Dual power change-over switch EQ1 series (ATS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

B1 B2 B3 B4

INDIRECT PROTECTION DEVICES Residual current devices JЕL1/2 SIGMA/OMEGA design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Combined circuit breakers with residual current device JЕL5 (RCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Combined circuit breaker with electronic residual current device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Surge arresters SPD type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8

CONTACTORS Low voltage contactors LT 1 - D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Low voltage contactors LT 1 - H K/D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Low voltage contactors LT 1 - F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Low voltage contactors with direct current coil LP 1-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 AC contactor for switching on of capacitors CJ19-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Reverse contactors LT 4-Dxx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Auxiliary contact blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Module contactors K series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

D1 D2 D3

CAPACITY COEFFICIENT COMPENSATION Complex compensating devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Capacitor batteries and cosφ regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Filters for harmonics and metal boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Е1 E2 Е3 Е4 E5 Е6 Е7 Е7 Е8 Е9

DEVICES FOR CONTROL AND PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS Thermal relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Auxiliary devices for thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Starters for direct start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 “Star/delta” starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Reverse starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 ELM 1000 frequency inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 ELM2000 frequency inverters with no-sensor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 ELM 2500 soft starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

TIMERS, RELAYS AND DISPLAYING DEVICES Programmable timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Digital counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Industrial Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Devices for temperature measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Current measurement transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Displaying measurement devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

CONTENTS

www.elmarkgroup.eu

G11 H1 H2 H3 H4

ELEMENTS FOR AUTOMATION, MONITORING AND CONTROL Limit switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Proximity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Capacitive sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Photoelectrical sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Float switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Rotary switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Buttons and LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Buttons and LED indicators for DIN-rail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Devices for telpher control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Warning lights and towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 HIGH POWER SAFETY DEVICES AND ISOLATING SWITCHES Security sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Bases for high power safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Fuse links for high power safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Isolating switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Switch disconnector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6

INDUSTRIAL PLUGS AND SOCKETS Industrial plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Static industrial plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Static industrial contacts for exposed wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Movable industrial contacts for exposed wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Industrial built in contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Distribution boxes with industrial contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

J1 I2 J3 J4 J5

PLASTIC BOXES AND METAL CABINETS FOR DISTRIBUTION BOARDS Plastic distribution boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Metal distribution boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Module plastic distribution boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Cable support systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Moisture-proof junction boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

K1 K2

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY AND GENERATORS Uninterruptible power supply systems UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10

M1 М2 М3 М4 М5 М6 М7 М8 М9 М10

INSTRUMENTS Manual meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Hydraulic crimping instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Hydraulic crimping instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Mechanical cutting instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Hand instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 CONSUMATIVES Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Voltage transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Non-insulated butt terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Non-insulated terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Insulated terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Consumatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Thermal shrinkable tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Multiplugs and cable reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

N1 N2 N3 N4 N5

ELECTRICAL SWITCHES AND SOCKETS "RHYME” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 "SPLENDOR" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 "BASIC" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 "LIFE STYLE" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 "HAKAN" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

L1 L2 L3 L4 L5

Certificates of the trade companies â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Bulgaria, Romania, Serbia

www.elmarkgroup.eu

ISO certificates of ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC

www.elmarkgroup.eu

ROHS certificates

www.elmarkgroup.eu

LVD certificates for compliance with Directive 2006/95/EC (ex-73/23/EEC) “Low Voltage Directives” Issued by the Center for Testing and European Certification Ltd.

www.elmarkgroup.eu

An EU Notified Body, registered by NANDO (New Approach Notified and Designated Organization) № 1871, http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/newapproach/nando

Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Bosnia and Herzegovina

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Serbia

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Certificates presenting ELMARK products for Croatia

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Certificate for international insurance in Alliance IRIND

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers C45, CL60-SIGMA/OMEGA design

www.elmarkgroup.eu

TERMINAL NON-FLAMMABLE COVER JUMP KNUCKLE HANDLE

LOCK KNACKLE MOVABLE CONTACT

OMEGA design

SIGMA design

ARC CHAMBER STATIC CONTACT MAXIMUM CURRENT RELEASE AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory) UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE (accessory) SHUNT RELEASE (accessory)

Characteristics Circuit breakers are automatically-operated electrical switches, designed to protect electrical circuits from damage caused by overload or short circuit. They can also be used as devices for commutation and control of electrical circuits. They differ in the following characteristics: * Operating voltage: 230, 400V * Number of poles: 1, 2, 3, 4 * Breaking curve: - curve B – breaks between 3 and 5 In, used for low voltage short circuit currents (long circuits and generators) - curve C – breaks between 5 and 10 In, used for protection of main power supply cables and conventional consumers - curve D – breaks between 10 and 20 In, used for protection of industrial consumers with high initial current flow (electric motors) * Breaking capacity: 4.5, 6, 10kA

Circuit breakers

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N - SIGMA design Type designation: С4xN constructive series number of poles (1;3) C x rated current breaking curve С Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1 EN 60947-2

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Functions: - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits - in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit - for mounting in housing and industrial buildings - for mounting at a distance from the transformer post from 150 to 850 m - allows protection of consumers generating short circuit currents up to 6000 A Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 6000A * Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu * Isolating voltage:≥2000V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥4000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000 * Class of current limiting:3 * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: B curve – the overload and short-circuit protection is activated at 3-5 ln. Used for protection of big length cables and power generators. C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply cables and conventional consumers * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 – A * Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance * Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C / 3s * Maximum current release containing: - copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type - resistance: from 0.6 to 180mΩ - welding effort: <150 000 N/mm2 - bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180 depending on the current - thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A) - magnetic core – composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9) - thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm - drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm2 - contact head of the movable contact – composition: silver graphite CAg(5) - dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A) - static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2 - composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Power supply (conducting) - power supply busbar 1P63, 3P63 - rigid conductors up to 25 mm2 - flexible conductors up to 16 mm2 * Tightening moment:1.33Nm Mounting: * vertical * DIN-rail * for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious interference * ambient temperature: -5°C to + 40°C±2° C Type

Rated current In (A)

Breaking capacity (kA)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Catalogue number Curve B

Package / Box (pcs)

C41N / 2A C41N / 4A C41N / 6A C41N / 10A C41N / 16A C41N / 20A C41N / 25A C41N / 32A C41N / 40A C41N / 50A C41N / 63A

2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41460 41461 41451 41452 41453 41454 41455 41456 41457 41458 41459

41460B 41461B 41451B 41452B 41453B 41454B 41455B 41456B 41457B 41458B 41459B

12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240

Circuit breakers

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C40N - SIGMA design

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Type

Rated current In (A)

Breaking capacity (kA)

C42N / 6A C42N / 10A C42N / 16A C42N / 20A C42N / 25A C42N / 32A C42N / 40A C42N / 50A C42N / 63A

6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

Type

Rated current In (A)

Breaking capacity (kA)

6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

Rated current In (A)

Breaking capacity (kA)

C43N / 6A C43N / 10A C43N / 16A C43N / 20A C43N / 25A C43N / 32A C43N / 40A C43N / 50A C43N / 63A

Type

C44N / 6A C44N / 10A C44N / 16A C44N / 20A C44N / 25A C44N / 32A C44N / 40A C44N / 50A C44N / 63A

C40 curve B t(s)

6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

Recommended sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box mounting Curve C Curve B (pcs) conductors (mm2)

1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41470 41471 41472 41473 41474 41475 41476 41477 41478

41470B 41471B 41472B 41473B 41474B 41475B 41476B 41477B 41478B

6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120

Recommended sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box mounting Curve C Curve B (pcs) conductors (mm2)

1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41541 41542 41543 41544 41545 41546 41547 41548 41549

41541B 41542B 41543B 41544B 41545B 41546B 41547B 41548B 41549B

6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120

Recommended sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box mounting Curve C Curve B (pcs) conductors (mm2)

1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

C40 curve C t(s)

41480C 41481C 41482C 41483C 41484C 41485C 41486C 41487C 41488C

41480B 41481B 41482B 41483B 41484B 41485B 41486B 41487B 41488B

3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60

Circuit breakers

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) С60N - OMEGA design Type designation: С6xN constructive series number of poles (1;2;3;4) C x rated current breaking curve С Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Functions: - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits - in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit - for mounting in industrial buildings with high contamination level of the electric system - for mounting at a distance from the transformer post from 150 to 850 m - allows protection of consumers generating short circuit currents up to 6000 A Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 6000A * Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu * Isolating voltage:≥2000V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥8000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥50000 * Class of current limiting:3 * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: B – the maximum current release breaks between 3 and 5 In; used to protect long circuits and generators C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply cables and conventional consumers * Joining terminal: Combined screw clamp made of 1.5 cold extruded Q235-A material with additional coating * Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance * Status indicator * Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C / 3s * Heat resistance of internal non-electrical components: 850°С / 10 s * Maximum current release containing: - copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type - resistance: from 0.6 to 180mΩ - welding effort: <150 000 N/mm2 - bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180 depending on the current - thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A) - magnetic core – composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9) - thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm - drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm2 - contact head of the movable contact – composition: silver graphite CAg(5) - dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A) - static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2 - composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5)

* Power supply (conducting) - power supply busbar 1P63, 3P63 - rigid conductors up to 25 mm2 - flexible conductors up to 16 mm2 * Tightening moment:1.33Nm Mounting: * vertical * DIN-rail * for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious interference * ambient temperature: -5°C to + 40°C±2° C Type

Rated current In A

Breaking capacity (kA)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

C61N / 1A C61N / 2A C61N / 4A C61N / 6A C61N / 10A C61N / 16A C61N / 20A C61N / 25A C61N / 32A C61N / 40A C61N / 50A C61N / 63A

1 2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

Catalogue number Curve C

41100N 41102N 41104N 41106N 41110N 41116N 41120N 41125N 41132N 41140N 41150N 41163N

Catalogue number Curve B

Package/Box (pcs)

41501N 41502N 41504N 41506N 41510N 41516N 41520N 41525N 41532N 41540N 41550N 41563N

12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240

Circuit breakers

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) С60N - OMEGA design

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Type

Rated current In (A)

Breaking capacity (kA)

C62N / 2А C62N / 4A C62N / 6A C62N / 10A C62N / 16A C62N / 20A C62N / 25A C62N / 32A C62N / 40A C62N / 50A C62N / 63A

2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Type

Rated current In (A)

Breaking capacity (kA)

C63N/2A C63N/4A C63N / 6A C63N / 10A C63N / 16A C63N / 20A C63N / 25A C63N / 32A C63N / 40A C63N / 50A C63N / 63A

2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Type

Rated current In (A)

Breaking capacity (kA)

C64N / 2A C64N / 4A C64N / 6A C64N / 10A C64N / 16A C64N / 20A C64N / 25A C64N / 32A C64N / 40A C64N / 50A C64N / 63A

2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Recommended sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box mounting Curve C Curve B (pcs) conductors (mm2)

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41202N 41204N 41206N 41210N 41216N 41220N 41225N 41232N 41240N 41250N 41263N

41602N 41604N 41606N 41610N 41616N 41620N 41625N 41632N 41640N 41650N 41663N

6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120

Recommended sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box mounting Curve C Curve B (pcs) conductors (mm2)

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41302N 41304N 41306N 41310N 41316N 41320N 41325N 41332N 41340N 41350N 41363N

41702N 41704N 41706N 41710N 41716N 41720N 41725N 41732N 41740N 41750N 41763N

Recommended sections of the Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box mounting Curve C Curve B (pcs) conductors (mm2)

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41402N 41404N 41406N 41410N 41416N 41420N 41425N 41432N 41440N 41450N 41463N

3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60

41802N 41804N 41806N 41810N 41816N 41820N 41825N 41832N 41840N 41850N 41863N

C60 curve B

1. Thermal release

4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80 4 / 80

C60 curve C

1. Thermal release

2. Electromagnetic release

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100L - SIGMA design Type designation: С100L constructive series; number of poles (1;3) C x rated current breaking curve С Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1 EN 60947-2

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Type

Rated current In A

Breaking capacity (kA)

C101L/6A

C101L/10A

C101L/16A

C101L/20A

C101L/25A

C101L/32A

C101L/40A

C101L/50A

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Package / Box (pcs)

1.0

41101

12 / 240

1.5

41103

12 / 240

2.5

41105

12 / 240

2.5

41107

12 / 240

4.0

41108

12 / 240

6.0

41109

12 / 240

10.0

41111

12 / 240

10.0

41112

12 / 240

C101L/63A

16.0

41113

12 / 240

Type

Rated current In A

Breaking capacity (kA)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Package / Box (pcs)

C103L/6A

1.0

41301

4 / 80

C103L/10A

1.5

41303

4 / 80

C103L/16A

2.5

41305

4 / 80

C103L/20A

2.5

41307

4 / 80

C103L/25A

4.0

41308

4 / 80

C103L/32A

6.0

41309

4 / 80

C103L/40A

10.0

41311

4 / 80

C103L/50A

10.0

41312

4 / 80

C103L/63A

16.0

41313

4 / 80

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C100M

www.elmarkgroup.eu Type designation: С100М constructive series; number of poles (1;2;3;4) D x rated current breaking curve С; D

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1 EN 60947-2

Functions: - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuits of the outer circuit - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits - in combination with auxiliary devices it allows remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 10000A * Rated breaking capacity Ics= 75% Icu * Isolating volatage:≥2000V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥4000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000 * Class of current limiting:3 * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: C,D * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 – A * Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance * Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C / 3s * Maximum current release containing: - copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type - resistance: from 148 to 230mΩ - welding effort: <400 N/mm2 - bimetal plate – composition: TB180/0.5 - thickness: 0.8mm - magnetic core – composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9) - thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm - drawing effort: 20N/mm2 - contact head of the movable contact – composition: silver graphite CAg(5) - dimension 6x6x1 - static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2 - composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Power supply (conducting) - power supply busbar - rigid conductors up to 50 mm2 - flexible conductors up to 35 mm2 * Tightening moment:1.33Nm Mounting: * vertical * DIN-rail * possibility for labeling * for mounting in industrial environment * ambient temperature: -5°C to + 40°C±2° C

Poles

Rated current (A)

Breaking capacity (kA)

Catalogue number Curve C

Catalogue number Curve D

Package / Box (pcs)

41180

41180D

9 / 180

100

41190

41190D

9 / 180

125

41195

41190D

9 / 180

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB)C100M

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Poles

Rated current (A)

Breaking capacity Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box (kA) Curve C Curve D (pcs)

41280

41281

6 / 120

100

41290

41291

6 / 120

Poles

Rated current (A)

Poles

Breaking capacity Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box (kA) Curve C Curve D (pcs)

41380

41381

4 / 60

100

41390

41391

4 / 60

Rated current (A)

Breaking capacity Catalogue number Catalogue number Package / Box (kA) Curve C Curve D (pcs)

41480

41481

3 / 60

100

41490

41491

3 / 60

(C Type)

(D Type) t(s)

t(s) 1000

1000

5000

5000 2000

Thermal release

2000 1000

1000

500

200

100

Electromagnetic release

10 5 2

Thermal release

10 5

Electromagnetic release

0.5

0.5 0.2

0.2 0.1

0.1

0.05

0.02

0.01

0.005

0.002

0.002 0.001

0.001 0.5

3 4 5

7 10

20 30

50 70

100

200

i/in

0.5

3 4 5

7 10

20 30

50 70

100

200

i/in

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60DC series

Type designation

Functions: - for lowering constant current voltaic arc and use of the breaker at constant current consumer protection С6xDC constructive series - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit at alternating current and constant number of poles (1;2;3;4) current power supply circuits Cx rated current - for commutation and control of electrical circuits breaking curve С - in combination with auxiliary alternating current devices for remote control, commutation or indication of the protected circuit Documents corresponding to - for mounting in industrial buildings the product: - for protection of consumers generating short circuit currents to 6000 A at alternating current power supply Standard EN60898-1 Technical data: EN 60898-2 * Rated voltage: 240V; AC/DC * Breaking capacity (cycle O -CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898- 1: 6000A * Rated breaking capacity Ics=75% Icu * Insulating voltage: ≥2000V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥4000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥20000 * Class of current limiting: 3 * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: C – the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect power supply cables and conventional consumers * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal with composition 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235 – A * Plastic box – not keeping the burning material nylon PA66, UV rays wear resistance * Box permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C / 3s * Maximum current release containing: - copper coil - composition: pure copper T2 type - resistance: from 0.6 to 180mΩ - welding effort: <150 000 N/mm2 - bimetal plate – composition: 5J158 to TB180 according to the current - thickness: 0.6mm (up to 40A) and 0.8mm (up to 63A) - magnetic core – composition: coldly draw-plated metal wire (1Gr18Ni9) - thickness: 1.15 to 2.24μm - drawing effort: from 200 to 400N/mm2 - contact head of the movable contact – composition: silver graphite CAg(5) - dimension 3x3x0.8 (up to 40A) and 4x4x0.8 (up to 63A) - static contact – composition: pure copper T2Y2 - composition of the contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) - metal magnetic plate for lowering the constant current arc * Conducting: - power supply busbar 1P63 - rigid conductors up to 25 mm2 - flexible conductors up to 16 mm2 * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm Mounting * vertical * DIN-rail * for mounting in housing or industrial environment without serious current interference * Ambient temperature: -5°C to + 40°C±2° C

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) C60DC series

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Breaking capacity (kA)

Rated current In (A)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Package/Box (pcs)

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

1 2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 16.0

41164 41165 41166 41167 41168 41169 41170 41171 41172 41173 41174 41175

12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240

Type

Breaking capacity (kA)

Rated current In (A)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Package/Box (pcs)

62DC / 2A 62DC / 4A 62DC / 6A 62DC / 10A 62DC / 16A 62DC / 20A 62DC / 25A

6 6 6 6 6 6 6

2 4 6 10 16 20 25

1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0

41176 41177 41178 41179 41181 41182 41183

6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120 6 / 120

Type

61DC / 1A 61DC / 2A 61DC / 4A 61DC / 6A 61DC / 10A 61DC / 16A 61DC / 20A 61DC / 25A 61DC / 32A 61DC / 40A 61DC / 50A 61DC / 63A 36

72 65 49

Circuit breakers Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) DP1N (1P + N)

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Functions: - protection of the electrical circuits from overload or short circuit of the outer circuit - it can be used as a device for commutation and control of electrical circuits - it breaks simultaneously the lead and the neutral conductor as the heat protection is only at the lead conductor Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz * Breaking capacity (cycle O-CO) in accordance with standard EN 60 898-1: 4500 A * Rated breaking capacity Ics = 50% Icu * Insulating voltage: â&#x2030;Ľ2000V * IP code: IP>20 * Breaking curve: C â&#x20AC;&#x201C; the maximum current release breaks between 5 and 10 In; used to protect main power supply cables and conventional consumers Connecting: * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Power supply (conducting): - power supply busbar DP1N - flexible or rigid conductor * Mounting: on DIN-rail

Circuit breakers DP1N (1P+N) - SIGMA design Rated current

Breaking capacity (kA)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number Curve C

Package / Box (pcs)

DP1N / 6

4.5

1.0

41006

12 / 240

DP1N / 10

4.5

1.5

41010

12 / 240

DP1N / 16

4.5

2.5

41016

12 / 240

DP1N / 20

4.5

2.5

41020

12 / 240

DP1N / 25

4.5

4.0

41025

12 / 240

DP1N / 32

4.5

6.0

41032

12 / 240

Type

Circuit breakers Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers

Type designation: МN - constructive series number of poles - 1 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Combined voltage circuit-breaker МN2 Functions: - when the voltage is reduced below 170V operation is initiated and the automatic switch is turned off - when the voltage is increased above 270V operation is initiated and the automatic switch is turned off - allows manual turning on of the switch after powering is restored - indication of the position of the device Technical characteristics: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Insulation voltage: ≥2000V * Protection ratio: IP>20 Connection method: * Double connector: flat (tunnel) screw connector * Feeding (conducting): - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2 * Tightening moment of the screw: 1.33Nm Mounting: * vertical, by means of two pins attached to the rivets of the circuit-breaker, while the operating mechanism is connected to the switching off mechanism of the circuit breaker after the sealing lid is demounted Type

Type designation: МX - constructive series number of poles - 1 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1

Type designation: OF – constructive series number of poles – 1 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60898-1

Rated voltage

Type breaker

Catalogue number

Package/Box (pcs)

ELMARK MN 2 60

230V

С60;CL60N

41909

12 / 240

ELMARK MN 2 40

230V

C40;C100L

41919

12 / 240

Shunt release MX (independent release) Functions: - remote circuit breaker switching off at voltage feed - allows manual switching on of the breaker at voltage recovery - indication of the device's location Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: ≥2000V * IP code: IP>20 Connecting: * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Power supply (conducting): - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2 * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm * The power supply of the release is accomplished at the outlet of the breaker Mounting: * vertical, clamps with two pins to the breaker's rivets and the executive mechanism is joined up to the switching mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover Type

Rated voltage

Type breaker

Catalogue number

Package/Box (pcs)

ELMARK MX 60

230V

ELMARK MX 40

230V

С60;CL60N

41902

12 / 240

C40;C100L

41912

12 / 240

Auxiliary contact OF Functions: -at circuit breaker switching off it sends a signal to the control or signalization system -indication of the location of the auxiliary contact and the breaker Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230V * Isolating voltage: ≥2000V * Ingress protecting rating: IP>20 Connecting: * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Power supply (conducting): - flexible conductors up to 1.5mm2 Mounting: * vertical, clamps with two pins to breaker's rivets, and the executive mechanism is joined up to the switching mechanism of the breaker after dismounting the seal cover Type

Rated voltage

Type breaker

Catalogue number

Package/Box (pcs)

ELMARK OF 60

230V

С60;CL60N

41901

12 / 240

ELMARK OF 40

230V

C40;C100L

41911

12 / 240

ELMARK SD 40

230V

C40;C100L

41910

12 / 240

ELMARK SD100

230V

C100M

41909

12 / 240

Circuit breakers Switch disconnectors ISS 63…100A series

www.elmarkgroup.eu

A2 Standard EN 60947-3 и IEC947-3

Functions: - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits - breaking of electrical circuits - can be used as a main breaker Technical data: * Rated voltage: 230/400V; 50/60Hz * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Connecting: power supply busbar, rigid or flexible conductors * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm * Isolating voltage: ≥500V * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥10000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥20000 * IP code: IP>20 * Mounting: DIN-rail * Plastic material of UV rays * Ambient temperature: -20°C + 55°C

Poles

40 -100А

Poles

Rated current (A)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

63 80 100

Rated current (A)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

41914

12 / 240

41911

12 / 240

41912

12 / 240

41913

12 / 240

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

41924

6 / 120

41921

6 / 120

41922

6 / 120

100

41923

6 / 120

Rated current (A)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

41934

4 / 80

41931

4 / 80

41932

4 / 80

100

41933

4 / 80

Rated current (A)

Recommended sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

41944

3 / 60

41941

3 / 60

41942

3 / 60

100

41943

3 / 60

Circuit breakers Isolating switches ISS2 125…800A series

Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The series three- and four-pole load isolating switch ISS2 xxx are produced for mounting in main electrical boards for disconnection of the circuits, switching on of generators because of the fact they are not affected by the frequency variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. Simple and secure management. There is a possibility for the products to be produced with an window for visible disconnection. Functions: - switching on and off of electrical circuits under load - disconnection of electrical circuits - used as main circuit-breaker - resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the protected circuit - it has no protective function A2 Technical features: * Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz * Double connector: screw connection * Connection: solid or flexible conductors * Insulation voltage: ≥1000V * Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): ≥5 000 * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): ≥10 000 * Protection ratio: IP>20 * Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts * Plastic resistant to UV raysPlastic resistant to UV rays * Ambient temperature: -20°÷40ºС Dimensions Type

ISS2-125/3 140 135 125

120 120

3.5

ISS2-125/4 170 135 125

150 150

3.5

ISS2-160/3 140 135 125

120 120

3.5

ISS2-160/4 170 135 125

150 150

3.5

ISS2-250/3 180 170 138

160 160

3.5

ISS2-250/4 230 170 138

210 210

3.5

ISS2-400/3 230 240 165

110 210 210 140

ISS2-400/4 295 240 165

110 275 275 140

ISS2-630/3 230 260 165

110 210 210 140

ISS2-630/4 295 260 165

110 275 275 140

ISS2-800/3 378 312 240

140 353 353 175

ISS2-800/4 498 312 240

140 473 473 175

Rated current In(A)

Maximum breaking capacity Icu(A)

Tightening moment (Nm)

Catalogue number three-pole

ISS2-125in

125

1250

6.5

41951

41961

1 / 12

ISS2-125out

125

1250

6.5

41952

41962

1 / 12

ISS2-160in

160

1250

6.5

41953

41963

1 / 12

ISS2-160out

160

1250

6.5

41954

41964

1 / 12

Type

Catalogue number four-pole

Box / carton (pcs)

ISS2-250in

250

2000

41955

41965

1/6

ISS2-250out

250

2000

41956

41966

1/6

ISS2-400in

400

3200

14.5

41957

41967

1/2

ISS2-630in

630

4000

14.5

41958

41968

1/2

ISS2-800in

800

1000

41959

41969

1/2

Note: ISS2-xxx in – load circuit-breaker for mounting in the interior of a board ISS2 -xxx out – load circuit-breaker with an extended lever for mounting on the front panel of the board

Circuit breakers Manual switching to reserve series EQ 2M from 125 to 800А

www.elmarkgroup.eu

A2 Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-3 and IEC 60947-6

The series three- and four-pole load isolating switch EQ 2 M xxx are produced for mounting in main electrical boards for disconnection of the circuits, manual switching between two power supplies or switching ON of generators because of the fact they are not affected by the frequency variations. High mechanical strength and resistance to circulation. Simple and secure management. There is a possibility for the products to be produced with an window for visible disconnection. Functions: - switching on and off of low voltage electrical circuits under load - disconnection of the electrical circuit from one of the power supplies, while providing immediately switching to the other - used as main switch - resistant to high voltages, to short circuits in the protected circuit - it has no protective function Technical characteristics: * Rated voltage: not higher than 660V; 50/60Hz * Double connector: screw connection * Connection: hard or flexible conductors * Insulation voltage: ≥1000V * Resistance to impulse voltage: 8000V * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): ≥5 000 * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): ≥10 000 * Protection ratio: IP>20 * Mounting method: to a surface by means of bolts * Plastic resistant to UV rays * Ambient temperature: -20°÷40ºС * Option for moving the handle on the front panel of the board * Small size * Indication which of the two supplies is operating Dimensions Type

ЕQ2M-160/3 270 135 212

89 150 120

3.5

EQ2M-160/4 300 135 212 104 150 150

3.5

ЕQ2M-250/3 307 170 260 110 180 160

65 115

3.5

EQ2M-250/4 357 170 260 135 180 210

65 115

3.5

ЕQ2M-400/3 372 240 297 150 236 210

77 180

EQ2M-400/4 432 240 297 180 236 275

77 180

ЕQ2M-630/3 372 240 297 150 236 210

77 180

EQ2M-630/4 432 240 297 180 236 275

77 180

ЕQ2M-800/3 372 240 297 150 236 210

77 180

EQ2M-800/4 432 240 297 180 236 275

77 180

Maximum breaking capacity Icu(A)

Tightening moment (Nm)

Catalogue number three-pole

ЕQ2M-160

160

1250

6.5

44641

44641P

1/4

ЕQ2M-250

250

2000

44642

44642P

1/2

ЕQ2M-400

400

3200

14.5

44643

44643P

1/2

ЕQ2M-630

630

4000

14.5

44644

44644P

1/2

ЕQ2M-800

800

1000

44645

44645P

1/2

Rated current In(A)

Type

Catalogue number four-pole

Box / carton (pcs)

Circuit breakers High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A

www.elmarkgroup.eu

COVER

TERMINAL PLASTIC PLATE

TERMINALS

CONTACTS WITH BIMETAL PLATES

NON-FLAMABLE BASE

THERMAL SYSTEM WITH MOVABLE CONTACTS

STATIC CONTACTS

UNDER VOLTAGE RELEASE - UVR (accessory)

PART FROM THE COVER

REMOTE CONTROL – electrical (accessory)

SCREWS FOR TERMINALS

AUXILIARY CONTACT (accessory)

ARC CHAMBERS

SHUNT RELEASE (accessory)

ELEMENT FOR ADJUSTMENT

REMOTE CONTROL – manual (accessory)

Circuit breakers High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Functions: - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits - breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers - can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations - endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual - possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for automation Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: 2000V * Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal for the breakers up to 160A and a bolt connection for the breakers from 250A to 1600A * Connecting: - rigid or flexible conductors - front conductors joining - possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal * Plastic elements - not keeping the burning material nylon PA66 - box permitivity strength: >16MV/m * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C * Static contacts – alloy: pure copper T2Y2 - contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) - thickness: depends on the current * Tightening moment: 1.33Nm * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000 * IP code: IP>20 * Mounting: - joining with bolts - mounting position: vertical * Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Test button * Ambient temperature: -20°÷55ºС

Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-2

H H1 e

A W1 W

Overall dimensions (mm)

Type

DS1-125

76.2

120

DS1-160

120

DS1-250

105

170

104

DS1-400

140

257

DS1-630

210

DS1-800 DS1-1600

Installation dimensions (mm)

100

238

143.5

139

210

104

316

144

214

87.5

285

275

104

310

172

230

140

280

210

275

104

347

172

230

140

307

210

410

140

410

210

300

140

350

Type

Rated current In (A)

Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics

400V

690V

Maximum breaking capacity (кА)Icu

Жd

Жe

4 5

Thermal current adjustment (A)

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

8.5

Package / Box (pcs)

DS1-125

fixed

44040

1 / 20

DS1-125

fixed

44050

1 / 20

DS1-125

fixed

44063

1 / 20

DS1-125

fixed

44080

1 / 20

DS1-125

100

fixed

44090

1 / 20

DS1-125

125

fixed

44125

1 / 20

Circuit breakers High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS1 series from 40 to 800A Type

Rated current In (A)

Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics

DS1 - 160 DS1 - 160 DS1 - 160 DS1 - 160 DS1 - 160

63 80 100 125 160

22 22 22 22 22

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Maximum breaking capacity (кА)Icu

400V

690V

35 35 35 35 35

15 15 15 15 15

Thermal current adjustment (A)

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

44 - 63 56 - 80 70 - 100 88 - 125 112 - 160

25 25 50 50 70

44163 44164 44165 44166 44160

1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16 1 / 16

Type

Rated current In (A)

Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics

DS1 - 250 DS1 - 250

200 250

35 35

Type

Rated current In (A)

Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics

DS 1 - 400 DS 1 - 400

315 400

50 50

Type

Rated current In (A)

Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics

DS1 - 630 DS1 - 630

500 630

65 65

Type

Rated current In (A)

Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics

DS1 - 800

800

Maximum breaking capacity (кА)Icu

400V

690V

50 50

15 15

Maximum breaking capacity (кА)Icu

400V

690V

65 65

25 25

Maximum breaking capacity (кА)Icu

400V

690V

75 75

25 25

Maximum breaking capacity (кА)Icu

400V

690V

Thermal current adjustment (A)

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

140 - 200 175 - 250

120 120

44200 44250

1/6 1/6

Thermal current adjustment (A)

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

fixed fixed

240 240

44315 44401

1/3 1/3

Thermal current adjustment (A)

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

fixed fixed

2 x 185 2 x 185

44500 44630

1/2 1/2

Thermal current adjustment (A)

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

fixed

2 x 240

44800

1/2

Circuit breakers High capacity circuit breakers DS1 to 1600A – electronic type (MCCB)

www.elmarkgroup.eu Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-2

Functions: - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits - breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers - can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations - endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual - possibilities for electrical module parameters adjustment through direct modules (combination of keys) thus providing accurate protection from overload and short circuit - simultaneous protection of the three phases - possibility for auxiliary devices mounting for automation - contactor for TT test 15V DC Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: 2000V * Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Connecting: - rigid or flexible conductors - front conductors joining - possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥20000 * IP code: IP>20 * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°C * Mounting: - joining with bolts - mounting position: vertical * Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Test button * Ambient temperature: -20°÷55ºС L 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 1 A B C D

3S 6S 12S 18S

I OFF 1.5 2 4 6 8 10

xln

TEST 15V dc In=~630A

t o+ o-

Xl1

t1 l=6l1

Protecting functions: Function L – step adjustment for protection against overload. Adjustment of the operating current I1=0.4+1xIn with discreet coefficients as the value can be 0.4; 0.5; 0.6; 0.7; 0.8; 0.9; 0.95 and 1 Time delay adjustment t1 of the protection against overload – step adjustment with four values A-3s; B-6s; C-12s; D-18s when current is I=6I1. The diagram of the current curves is presented on fig.1 Adjustment of the transitory protection current against short circuit I3=X x I1 where X can take discreet value OFF; 1.5; 2; 4; 6; 8; 10 Type

DS1-400Е DS1-630Е DS1-800Е DS1-1250Е DS1-1250Е DS1-1600Е

Rated current In (A)

400 630 800 1000 1250 1600

Operating breaking capacity (kA) Ics

400V

690V

50 65 65 75 75 75

65 75 75 85 85 85

25 25 30 50 50 50

Maximum breaking capacity (кА)Icu

Fig.1

Thermal current adjustment (A)

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

160 - 400 252 - 630 320 - 800 400 - 1000 500 - 1250 640 - 1600

240 2x185 2x240 2x240 2x240 2x240

44940 44963 44980 44999 44925 44960

Package / Box (pcs)

1/3 1/2 1/2 1/1 1/1 1/1

Circuit breakers Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB)

www.elmarkgroup.eu

According to the way of mounting the auxiliary devices can be divided into two groups: - internal devices – accessories for whose mounting it is necessary to dismount the cover of the breakers and fix them in specially designed jacks - external devices – they are mounted right on the top cover of the breaker INTERNAL DEVICES Auxiliary contact (OF) The device changes its condition conformably to the breaker's condition; it has a NO and a NC contactor. Technical data: - for breakers up to 160A operating current through the auxiliary contact: 3A - for breakers from 250 to 800A operating current through the auxiliary contact: 6A - available joining conductors - labeling of the cables Mounting: Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory Documentation corresponding Connecting: to the product: Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-2 Type of the Catalogue Type of the Catalogue Type of the

breaker

number

breaker

number

breaker

Catalogue number

DS1 125/40+OF DS1 125/50+OF DS1 125/63+OF DS1 125/80+OF DS1 125/100+OF DS1 125/125+OF

44301 44302 44303 44304 44305 44306

DS1 160/160+OF DS1 250/200+OF DS1 250/250+OF DS1 400/400+OF DS1 630/500+OF DS1 630/630+OF

44307 44308 44309 44310 44311 44312

DS1 800/800+OF DS1 1600/1000+OF DS1 1600/1250+OF DS1 1600/1600+OF

44313 44314 44451 44316

Shunt release (MX) The device is used for remote control of breakers as at voltage signal it starts operating and switches off the breaker to which it is mounted Technical data: - rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50/60Hz - electromagnetic coil 100VA for breakers up to 400A - electromagnetic coil 150VA for breakers 630-800A - available joining conductors Mounting: Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory Connecting : Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors Type of the breaker

Operating voltage (V))

Catalogue number

DS1 125/40+MX DS1 125/40+MX DS1 125/40+MX+OF DS1 125/40+MX+OF DS1 125/50+MX DS1 125/50+MX DS1 125/50+MX+OF DS1 125/50+MX+OF DS1 125/63+MX DS1 125/63+MX DS1 125/63+MX+OF DS1 125/63+MX+OF DS1 125/80+MX DS1 125/80+MX DS1 125/80+MX+OF DS1 125/80+MX+OF DS1 125/100+MX DS1 125/100+MX DS1 125/100+MX+OF DS1 125/100+MX+OF DS1 125/125+MX DS1 125/125+MX DS1 125/125+MX+OF DS1 125/125+MX+OF DS1 160/100+MX DS1 160/100+MX DS1 160/100+MX+OF DS1 160/100+MX+OF

400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230

44317 44318 44319 44320 44321 44322 44323 44324 44326 44327 44328 44330 44331 44332 44334 44335 44336 44337 44338 44339 44340 44341 44342 44343 44463 44464 44465 44466

Type of the breaker

DS1 160/160+MX DS1 160/160+MX DS1 160/160+MX+OF DS1 160/160+MX+OF DS1 250/200+MX DS1 250/200+MX DS1 250/200+MX+OF DS1 250/200+MX+OF DS1 250/250+MX DS1 250/250+MX DS1 250/250+MX+OF DS1 250/250+MX+OF DS1 400/315+MX DS1 400/315+MX DS1 400/315+MX+OF DS1 400/315+MX+OF DS1 400/400+MX DS1 400/400+MX DS1 400/400+MX+OF DS1 400/400+MX+OF DS1 630/500+MX DS1 630/500+MX DS1 630/500+MX+OF DS1 630/500+MX+OF DS1 630/630+MX DS1 630/630+MX DS1 630/630+MX+OF DS1 630/630+MX+OF

Operating voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Type of the breaker

Operating voltage (V)

Catalogue number

400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230

44333 44344 44345 44346 44347 44348 44349 44350 44351 44352 44353 44354 44467 44468 44469 44470 44355 44356 44357 44358 44359 44360 44361 44362 44363 44364 44365 44366

DS1 800/800+MX DS1 800/800+MX DS1 800/800+MX+OF DS1 800/800+MX+OF DS1 1250/1000+MX DS1 1250/1000+MX DS1 1250/1000+MX+OF DS1 1250/1000+MX+OF DS1 1250/1250+MX DS1 1250/1250+MX DS1 1250/1250+MX+OF DS1 1250/1250+MX+OF DS1 1600/1600+MX DS1 1600/1600+MX DS1 1600/1600+MX+OF DS1 1600/1600+MX+OF DS1 400/3300+MX DS1 400/3300+MX DS1 400/3300+MX+OF DS1 400/3300+MX+OF DS1 630/3300+MX DS1 630/3300+MX DS1 630/3300+MX+OF DS1 630/3300+MX+OF DS1 800/3300+MX DS1 800/3300+MX DS1 800/3300+MX+OF DS1 800/3300+MX+OF

400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230

44367 44368 44369 44370 44371 44372 44373 44374 44375 44376 44377 44378 44379 44380 44381 44382 44451 44452 44453 44454 44455 44456 44457 44458 44459 44460 44461 44462

Circuit breakers Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB)

www.elmarkgroup.eu

A3 DS1 - 250-800

DS1 - 125-160

Under voltage release (MN) The device switches off and/or does not allow the switching on of the breaker to which it is mounted at power breakdown or voltage decrease under certain limits Technical data: - operating voltage: 230/400V 50Hz - electromagnetic coil 6VA for breakers up to 400A - electromagnetic coil 10VA for breakers 630-800A - available joining conductors - switches off at voltage decrease under 75% of the operating Mounting: Mounted in a special jack after cover dismounting Note: The breakers are offered with mounted accessory Connecting: Connected with the operative system through the provided conductors Type of the breaker

Operating voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Type of the breaker

Operating voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Ds1 125/40+MN DS1 125/40+MN DS1 125/40+MN+OF DS1 125/40+MN+OF DS1 125/50+MN DS1 125/50+MN DS1 125/50+MN+OF DS1 125/50+MN+OF DS1 125/63+MN DS1 125/63+MN DS1 125/63+MN+OF DS1 125/63+MN+OF DS1 125/80+MN DS1 125/80+MN DS1 125/80+MN+OF DS1 125/80+MN+OF DS1 125/100+MN DS1 125/100+MN DS1 125/100+MN+OF DS1 125/100+MN+OF DS1 125/125+MN DS1 125/125+MN DS1 125/125+MN+OF DS1 125/125+MN+OF DS1 160/100+MN DS1 160/100+MN DS1 160/100+MN+OF DS1 160/100+MN+OF DS1 160/160+MN DS1 160/160+MN DS1 160/160+MN+OF DS1 160/160+MN+OF DS1 250/200+MN DS1 250/200+MN DS1 250/200+MN+OF DS1 250/200+MN+OF DS1 250/250+MN DS1 250/250+MN DS1 250/250+MN+OF DS1 250/250+MN+OF DS1 400/315+MN DS1 400/315+MN DS1 400/315+MN+OF DS1 400/315+MN+OF DS1 400/400+MN DS1 400/400+MN DS1 400/400+MN+OF DS1 400/400+MN+OF DS1 630/500+MN DS1 630/500+MN

400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230

44383 44384 44385 44386 44387 44388 44389 44390 44391 44392 44393 44394 44395 44396 44397 44398 44399 44402 44405 44406 44407 44408 44409 44410 44475 44476 44477 44478 44411 44412 44413 44414 44415 44416 44417 44418 44419 44420 44421 44422 44479 44480 44481 44482 44423 44424 44425 44426 44427 44428

DS1 630/500+MN+OF DS1 630/500+MN+OF DS1 630/630+MN DS1 630/630+MN DS1 630/630+MN+OF DS1 630/630+MN+OF DS1 800/800+MN DS1 800/800+MN DS1 800/800+MN+OF DS1 800/800+MN+OF DS1 1250/1000+MN DS1 1250/1000+MN DS1 1250/1000+MN+OF DS1 1250/1000+MN+OF DS1 1250/1250+MN DS1 1250/1250+MN DS1 1250/1250+MN+OF DS1 1250/1250+MN+OF DS1 1600/1600+MN DS1 1600/1600+MN DS1 1600/1600+MN+OF DS1 1600/1600+MN+OF DS1 400/3300+MN DS1 400/3300+MN DS1 400/3300+MN+OF DS1 400/3300+MN+OF DS1 630/3300+MN DS1 630/3300+MN DS1 630/3300+MN+OF DS1 630/3300+MN+OF DS1 800/3300+MN DS1 800/3300+MN DS1 800/3300+MN+OF DS1 800/3300+MN+OF

400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230

44429 44430 44431 44432 44433 44434 44435 44436 44437 44438 44439 44440 44441 44442 44443 44444 44445 44446 44447 44448 44449 44450 44483 44484 44485 44486 44487 44488 44489 44490 44491 44492 44493 44494

Circuit breakers Auxiliary devices for high capacity circuit breakers DS1 type (MCCB)

www.elmarkgroup.eu

EXTERNAL DEVICES Remote control (manual) Description: The device switches off/on the breaker to which manual operative rotary mechanism is mounted - two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90°C Mounting: The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 mounting), and the handle is mounted at the door of the distribution box, using an extension axis it is joined to the base Table with the dimensions for manual remote control Type of the breaker

HDC DS 1 HDC DS 1 HDC DS 1 HDC DS 1 HDC DS 1 HDC DS 1

scheme 1

DS1 - 125-160

DS1 - 250-1600 scheme 2

125A 160A 250A 400A 630A 800A

Dimensions (mm) A

Dmin

Dmax

25 30 35 45 70 70

50 50 70 107 119 119

65 65 80 85 110 110

115 115 130 105 110 110

Type of the breaker

Type

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

DS1 125A DS1 160A DS1 250A DS1 400A DS1 630A DS1 800A

ELMARK HDC ELMARK HDC ELMARK HDC ELMARK HDC ELMARK HDC ELMARK HDC

44967 44968 44969 44970 44971 44972

1 1 1 1 1 1

Device for remote control (electrical) Description: The device switches off/on the breaker to which it is mounted, at electrical signal it allows control from a great distance Technical data: - operating voltage of the executive mechanism: 230/400V 50/60Hz - two operating positions of the executive mechanism fixed at 90°C - two types of executive mechanism: * magnetic operation for breakers DS1 up to 160A * motor operation for breakers DS1 from 250 to 800A Mounting: The base is mounted with bolts right on the cover (scheme 1 and 2), and buttons on/off are fixed at the door of the distribution box and at the remote control device Type of the breaker

Operating voltage

Type

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

DS1 125 DS1 160 DS1 250 DS1 400 DS1 630 DS1 800 DS1 125 DS1 160 DS1 250 DS1 400 DS1 630 DS1 800 DS1 1600 DS1 1600

400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 400V

ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC ELMARK ADC

44907 44908 44909 44910 44911 44911 44912 44913 44914 44915 44916 44916 44924 44926

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Table with the dimensions for remote control Type of the breaker

scheme 3

АDC DS 1 125 ADC DS 1 160 ADC DS 1 250 ADC DS 1 400 ADC DS 1 630 ADC DS 1 800

Dimensions (mm) A

А1

103.5 103.5 139 226 226 226

110 110 -

30 35 132 132 132 132

90 90 -

92 92 105 132 132 132

Circuit breakers High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS2 series 63…1250A

www.elmarkgroup.eu d

Overall dimensions (mm)

Type of the breaker

142

155

106

165

DS2-63

H H1

DS2-100 DS2-225 DS2-400

148

256

110

DS2-500

180

270

103

115

DS2-630

180

270

103

115

DS2-800

210

115

275

Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 Functions: EN 60947-2 - no auxiliaries available for this type of MCCB - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits . - breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers - can be used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations - endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 400V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥6000V * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Connecting: - rigid or flexible conductors - front conductors joining - possibility for mounting to lengthening terminal * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥6000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000 * IP code: IP>20 * Mounting: - joining with bolts - mounting position: vertical * Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Test button * Ambient temperature: -20°÷55ºС DS2-1250

Type

DS2 - 63

210

Rated current In (A)

Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu

200

137

330(460)

Operating breaking capacity (кА)Ics

Operating breaking capacity (mm2)

Protection from overload

Catalogue number

fixed

44006

Package / Box (pcs)

1 / 12

Type

Rated current In (A)

Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu

Operating breaking capacity (кА)Ics

Operating breaking capacity (mm2)

Protection from overload

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

DS2 - 100

100

fixed

44010

1 /12

Circuit breakers High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DS2 series 63…1250A Type

DS2 - 225

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Rated current In (A)

Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu

Operating breaking capacity (кА)Ics

Operating breaking capacity (mm2)

Protection from overload

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

225

fixed

44022

1 / 12

Type

DS2 - 400

Type

DS2 - 630 DS2 - 630

Type

DS2 - 800

Type

DS2 - 1250 DS2 - 1250

Rated current In (A)

400

Rated current In (A)

500 630

Rated current In (A)

800

Rated current In (A)

1000 1250

Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu

Operating breaking capacity (кА)Ics

Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu

Operating breaking capacity (кА)Ics

50 50

Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu

85 85

42 42

Operating breaking capacity (кА)Ics

65 65

Operating breaking capacity (mm2)

180

Operating breaking capacity (mm2)

240 240

Operating breaking capacity (mm2)

240

Operating breaking capacity (mm2)

240 240

Protection from overload

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

fixed

44004

1 / 12

Protection from overload

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

fixed fixed

44005 44036

1/2 1/2

Protection from overload

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

fixed

44008

1/1

Protection from overload

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

fixed fixed

44000 44502

1/1 1/1

Circuit breakers

High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-2; IEC 947-2

Center of the installation opening

Side special level , wiring terminal

The DW1 series is an intelligent type circuit breaker used to control and protect low voltage electrical distribution network. Possibility to set the parameters of the circuit protection, built in under voltage release, remote control, earth protection and load monitoring. Functions: - switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits - breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers - used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations - endures high currents of short circuit in the protected circuit - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - motor control - mounted auxiliary devices for automation - under voltage release, earth protection, intelligent controlling block with a possibility for a choice of the protected function Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz * Isolating voltage: 2000V * Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥8000V * Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to the power supply rail * Connecting: - copper rails - busway connection – at the back * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥500 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥9000 * IP code: IP54 * Mounting: - clamping with bolts - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum 5° * Plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Test button * Ambient temperature: -10°C + 45°C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Basic protective functions: * Overload protection with long time delay * Short circuit protection with short time delay, time inversion limit * Short circuit protection with short time delay, time fixed limit * Instantaneous short circuit protection * Earth protection function * Full stability function * “Overload alarm” function * Test function * Auto diagnostics function A commutation type of breakers with RS 485 connection for duplex transmission of all function parameters, adjustment and data can also be produced at client's order and delivery terms agreement.

Starndart level

Installation openings Center of the installation opening Instalation base

Outside dimensions

A H W B L L1 H1 H2 H3 W1/W2 L5 L6 L7 W3-W5 Ø

DW1 2000A

DW1 3200A

340 402 362 150 373 290 52 112 20 95 17 40 82 60 12

352 432 435 175 507 448 92 112 30 115 17 40 82 100 12

Circuit breakers

High capacity circuit breakers (MCCB) DW1 series

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Connecting scheme Main circuit

Emergency breaking

Intelligent controller

SB1

Electrical closing

J21

SB2

Closed

Fault 3 5

Electrical breaking

Break

Accumulated energy

SB3

Auxiliary switches

31 33 35

36 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 XT

A5 Q

3(or4) 6(or8)

Main loop power supply

Control power supply

Process unit

(+)

Operating power supply

(-) 1 2

AC380V/220V

DC power supply module

U1(+) U2(-) DC220V¡ 110V

Тип

Номинален ток In (A)

Номинално напрежение Un (V)

Изключвателна възможност (кА)

Електрическа износоустойчивост (брой цикли)

Механична износоустойчивост (брой цикли)

Каталожен номер

Ед.опаковка / кашон (бр.)

DW1 - 2000

2000

690

500

9500

44209

1/1

DW1 - 3200

2500 3200

690 690

100 100

500 500

9500 9500

44255 44329

1/1 1/1

Circuit breakers Dual power change-over switch EQ1 series (ATS)

www.elmarkgroup.eu Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-2; EN 60947-6-1

The system for dual power change-over switch EQ1 is designed to provide continuous power supply and two electrical sources automatic switch in case of failure or deviation from the set parameters. The system for dual power change-over switch consists of two high capacity circuit breakers mounted on a metal frame connected with common operating mechanism and controlled by a command device that controls the system parameters' correspondence. Functions: * Switching on/off heavy loaded electrical circuits at main power supply discrepancy * Switching to dual power change-over at power supply phase lack * Breaking of electrical circuits and control of powerful consumers * Used as a main breaker in housing or industrial distributing installations supplied with a generator or a second power supply source (hospitals, post offices, military sites, control rooms) * Remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics * Control: motor * Controls the following circuit parameters: - presence of the three phases - the phase voltage to be in the set limits - overload - short circuit at the outlet Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 690V; 50/60Hz * Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥6000V * Joining terminal: bolt connection with 4 bolts to the power supply rail * Connecting: - copper rails - flexible or rigid conductors * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥60000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles): ≥10000 * IP code: IP21 * Mounting: - clamping with bolts - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum 5° * Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10°C + 45°C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Basic functions of the control device: * Overload protection * Instantaneous short circuit protection * Under phase protection * Undervoltage protection * Possibility for setting the change-over time between the two sources – min 3s * Possibility for automatic switch-over to the main power supply source after restoring its parameters The system for dual power change-over switch is offered in two types: - with display (control device) mounted on the mounting plate (integrated type) - with separated control display Dimensions for ABP Eq1 Dimensions (mm) Type of the breaker

main power supply

inner type EQ1 - 100 EQ1 - 225 EQ1 - 400 EQ1 - 630 moved type EQ1 - 100 EQ1 - 225 EQ1 - 400 EQ1 - 630

alternative power supply

480 480 620 660

240 240 300 300

450 450 590 630

210 210 270 270

140 140 235 240

420 420 570 610

230 230 300 300

390 390 540 580

200 200 270 270

145 145 235 240

Section of the Electrical power supply wear resistance 2 conductor (mm ) (number of cycles)

Type

Rated current In (A)

Max. breaking capacity (kA) Icu

EQ1 - 100 EQ1 - 225 EQ1 - 400 EQ1 - 630

100 225 400 630

22 35 42 50

15 25 35 42

35 70 180 240

6000 6000 6000 6000

44100 44225 44043 44633

1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1

EQ1 - 100* EQ1 - 225* EQ1 - 400* EQ1 - 630*

100 225 400 630

22 35 42 50

15 25 35 42

35 70 180 240

6000 6000 6000 6000

44101 44226 44404 44634

1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1

Operating breaking capacity (кА) Ics

Note: *Dual power change-over switch with separated control display

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

Indirect protection devices Residual current devices JЕL1/2 SIGMA/OMEGA design

www.elmarkgroup.eu COVER TERMINALS NON-FLAMABLE BASE CONTACT TEST BUTTON SECONDARY WINDING OF TT PRIMARY WINDING SUMMING CURRENT TRANSFORMER (TT) WITH TOROID

OMEGA design

SIGMA design

ELECTROMAGNETIC RELAY BREAKING (RELEASE) UNIT

Indirect protection devices Residual current devices JЕL1/JEL2 (RCD)

www.elmarkgroup.eu Standard EN 61008-1 EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1

Fig.1

The residual current device works with no extra power supply to the operating mechanism. It compares the magnitude of the currents through the neutral and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on toroid and together with the secondary winding form a measurement transformer. The power conductors are coiled in such a way that the magnetic fields generated at electrical current flow through them are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation of some of the conductors or at presence of a person under voltage, the system is misbalanced and the magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This residual field generates in the secondary current winding, called current leakage. The device breaks when the value of this current exceeds the limit value of the residual current breaker. Functions: - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at presence of a person under voltage - used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at exit failure Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50/60 Hz * Rated current: according to the table * Responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA * Time delay until break: <0.1s at I ∆ n and <0.04s at 2I ∆ n * Surge voltage wear resistance: ≥2000V * Short circuit current wear resistance: 6000A * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made of 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A * Type of the plastic: - material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66 - permitivity strength: >18MV/m * Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥5000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000 * IP code: IP>20 * Indication for operating (switched on) position * Plastic material of the breakers of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10°C + 45°C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Connecting: - power supply busbar (only for bipolar) - flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section Mounting: - on DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor and the earthing conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have three- or five-conductor grid with separate protective conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors). The corpus of the consumer depending on the grid type must be connected either to the protective conductor or be earthed. (Fig.1)

Connecting scheme

consumer JЕL1 2P

R S T

JЕL1 4P consumer PE

Indirect protection devices Residual current devices JЕL1/JEL2 (RCD)

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Residual current devices JЕL1 - OMEGA design, 6kA Number of poles

Type

Catalogue number Leakage current I D n(mA)

Rated current In (A)

Package / Box ( pcs)

100

300

500

JEL 1

10.0

40210

40212

40213

40214

1 / 60

JEL 1

16.0

40216

40217

40218

40219

1 / 60

JEL 1

20.0

40292

40293

40294

40295

1 / 60

JEL 1

25.0

40221

40222

40223

40224

1 / 60

JEL 1

32.0

40231

40232

40233

40234

1 / 60

JEL 1

40.0

40241

40242

40243

40244

1 / 60

JEL 1

63.0

40261

40262

40263

40264

1 / 60

JEL 1

80.0

40281

40282

40283

40284

1 / 60

JEL 1

100.0

40291

40296

40297

40298

1 / 60

Number of poles

Type

Rated current In (A)

100

300

500

JEL 1

10.0

40410

40412

40413

40414

1 / 30

JEL 1

16.0

40416

40417

40418

40419

1 / 30

JEL 1

20.0

40492

40493

40494

40495

1 / 30

JEL 1

25.0

40421

40422

40423

40424

1 / 30

JEL 1

32.0

40431

40432

40433

40434

1 / 30

JEL 1

40.0

40441

40442

40443

40444

1 / 30

JEL 1

63.0

40461

40462

40463

40464

1 / 30

JEL 1

80.0

40481

40482

40483

40484

1 / 30

JEL 1

100.0

40491

40496

40497

40498

1 / 30

Catalogue number Leakage current I D n(mA)

Package / Box ( pcs)

Residual current devices JЕL2 - SIGMA design, 6kA Number of poles

Type

Catalogue number Leakage current I D n(mA)

Rated current In (A)

100

Package / Box ( pcs)

300

500

JEL 2

10.0

40210S

40212S

40213S

40214S

1 / 60

JEL 2

16.0

40216S

40217S

40218S

40219S

1 / 60

JEL 2

20.0

40292S

40293S

40294S

40295S

1 / 60

JEL 2

25.0

40221S

40222S

40223S

40224S

1 / 60

JEL 2

32.0

40231S

40232S

40233S

40234S

1 / 60

JEL 2

40.0

40241S

40242S

40243S

40244S

1 / 60

JEL 2

63.0

40261S

40262S

40263S

40264S

1 / 60

JEL 2

80.0

40281S

40282S

40283S

40284S

1 / 60

JEL 2

100.0

40291S

40296S

40297S

40298S

1 / 60

Number of poles

Type

Rated current In (A)

Catalogue number Leakage current I D n(mA)

100

Package / Box ( pcs)

300

500

JEL 2

10.0

40410S

40412S

40413S

40414S

1 / 30

JEL 2

16.0

40416S

40417S

40418S

40419S

1 / 30

JEL 2

20.0

40492S

40493S

40494S

40495S

1 / 30

JEL 2

25.0

40421S

40422S

40423S

40424S

1 / 30

JEL 2

32.0

40431S

40432S

40433S

40434S

1 / 30

JEL 2

40.0

40441S

40442S

40443S

40444S

1 / 30

JEL 2

63.0

40461S

40462S

40463S

40464S

1 / 30

JEL 2

80.0

40481S

40482S

40483S

40484S

1 / 30

JEL 2

100.0

40491S

40496S

40497S

40498S

1 / 30

Indirect protection devices Combined circuit breakers with residual current device JЕL5 (RCD)

www.elmarkgroup.eu Standard EN60 898-1; EN 61 008-1; EN 61008-2; EN 60947-1

Description of the operating system: It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and residual current electromagnetic device. It combines the properties of the two elements. The circuit breaker reacts at short circuit or overload in the protected circuit, and the electromagnetic residual current device - at failure in the conductors’ insulation. It compares the magnitude of the currents through the neutral and phase conductors. The conductors are coiled on toroid and together with the secondary winding form a measurement transformer. The power conductors are coiled in such a way that the magnetic fields generated at electrical current flow through them are mutually neutralized. At failure in the insulation of some of the conductors or at presence of a person under voltage, the system is misbalanced and the magnetic fields can not be neutralized. This residual magnetic field generates in the secondary current winding, called current leakage. When the value of this current exceeds the limit value of the residual current breaker the device breaks and the residual current device switches off from the power supply grid. The device operates without any extra power supply to the electromagnetic residual current and is not influenced by voltage varying or decreasing. Functions: - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at short circuit or overload - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at presence of a person under voltage - used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at failure in the insulation after the breaker Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230V 50 Hz * Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table * Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA * Time delay until break: - of the residual current device: <0.1s at I ∆ n and <0.04s at 2I ∆ n - of the circuit breaker: <0.1s * Circuit breaker breaking curve: C * Surge voltage wear resistance:≥2000V * Breaking capacity: 6000A * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal made of 1.5 coldly draw-plated plane Q235A * Type of the plastic: - material: self-extinguishing nylon PA66 - dielectrical strength: >18MV/m * Contact head: silver graphite CAg(5) * Static contact: pure copper T2Y2 type * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥≥5000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥≥10000 * IP code: IP>20 * Indication for operating (switched on) position * Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 45Cْ * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section Mounting: - on DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor and the earthing conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have three- or five-conductor grid with separate operating neutral conductor (N) and separate protecting conductor (PE) (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors).

Combined electromagnetic residual current device and circuit breaker 1P 6kA Type designation

Number of poles of the residual current device/circuit breaker

Breaking capacity (kA)

Sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

Rated current (A)

JEL5 JEL5 JEL5 JEL5 JEL5

2 2 2 2 2

6 6 6 6 6

1.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10.0

10 16 25 32 40

Catalogue number Leakage current IΔ n (30mА)

40010 40016 40025 40032 40040

Leakage Leakage Leakage current current current IΔ n (100mА) IΔ n (300mА) IΔ n (500mА)

40011 40017 40021 40031 40041

40013 40018 40023 40033 40043

40015 40019 40026 40035 40045

Package / Box (pcs)

7 / 140 7 / 140 7 / 140 7 / 140 7 / 140

Indirect protection devices Combined circuit breaker with electronic residual current device

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Description of the operating system: It is a combination of automatic circuit breaker and residual current electromagnetic device. It combines part of the properties of the two elements. The circuit breaker reacts at short circuit in the protected circuit, and the electromagnetic residual current device - at failure in the conductors’ insulation. It compares the rate of the currents through the conductors in an electronic comparator. The residual current device operates normally at voltage feed. The voltage is needed for the comparator’s energizing – a semi-conductor element with constantly set leakage current rate. This rate is compared with the actual rate. When the margin of the comparison is neutral, the residual current device does not operate, but at failure in the protected circuit insulation when it exceeds the set margin it operates and switches off the protection. For the normal operation of the residual current device, the power supplying circuit voltage must be over 170V and there must be no time variation. Functions: - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at short circuit or overload B3 - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at insulation damage of the conductors to the consumers - switching off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at presence of a person under voltage - used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: manual switching on and automatic switching off at exit failure Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V 50 Hz * Circuit breaker rated current: according to the table * Residual current responsiveness: 30; 100; 300; 500mA * Time delay until break: - of the residual current device: <0.1s at I ∆ n and <0.04s at 2I ∆ n - of the circuit breaker: <0.1s * Circuit breaker breaking curve: C * Surge voltage wear resistance:≥2000V * Breaking capacity: 4500A; 6000А * Joining terminal: flat (tunnel) screw terminal * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥≥500 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥≥2000 * IP code: IP>20 * Indication for operating (switched on) position Connecting: - power supply busbar (for two- or three polar) - flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section Mounting: - on DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical * Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 45Cْ 3P+N * Installation altitude: up to 2000m

88 95

115.5 95

Standard EN60 898-1 EN 61 009-1 EN 61009-2 EN 60947-1

Geometrical dimensions

JEL3 JEL4 L(mm) H(mm) h(mm)

18 72 80

35 72 80

The residual current device is mounted in the distribution box, and after the device the neutral conductor and the earthing conductor must not be connected together. In order to work accurately, the device must have separate conductors for operational neutral conductor (N) and protective conductor (e.g. earthing system TN-S or TT with three or five conductors).

Combined electronic residual current device with circuit breaker 1P, 6кА Type designation

JEL 4 C10 JEL 4 C16 JEL 4 C20 JEL 4 C25 JEL 4 C32 JEL 4 C40

Number of poles of the residual current device/circuit breaker

2 2 2 2 2 2

Breaking capacity (kA)

6 6 6 6 6 6

Sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

1.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 10.0 16.0

Rated current (A)

10 16 20 25 32 40

Leakage current IΔ n (30mА)

40211E 40215E 40225E 40240E 40265E 40274E

Cat. number Package /Box Leakage Leakage Leakage (pcs) current current current IΔ n (100mА) IΔ n (300mА) IΔ n (500mА)

40207E 40245E 40229E 40204E 40260E 40270E

40208E 40235E 40230E 40246E 40236E 40273E

40209E 40237E 40238E 40268E 40269E 40275E

5 / 100 5 / 100 5 / 100 5 / 100 5 / 100 5 / 100

Indirect protection devices Combined circuit breaker with electronic residual current device

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Combined circuit breakers with electronic residual current device for Domestic Use Type JEL 3 Specially designed for domestic consumers. RCBO is based on DP1N and reacts to cable insulation leakages, current overloads and output short circuits. Technical Specifications: Rated voltage: 230 V; 50 Hz Rated Current: See the table below Sensitivity: 30; 100 mA Break time: <0.1s Short circuit capacity: 4500A Installation: direct DIN rail mounting

Type designation

JEL 3 C10 JEL 3 C16 JEL 3 C25 JEL 3 C32

Number of poles of the residual current device/circuit breaker

Breaking capacity (kA)

2 2 2 2

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

Sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

1.5 2.5 4.0 10.0

Rated current (A)

10 16 25 32

Leakage current IΔ n (30mА)

40110E 40116E 40125E 40132E

Catalogue number Leakage Leakage Leakage current current current IΔ n (100mА) IΔ n (300mА) IΔ n (500mА)

Package /Box (pcs)

12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240 12 / 240

40111E 40115E 40126E 40133E

Combined electronic residual current device 3P and circuit breakers 3P with breaking capacity of 4.5 kA. Compares the leakage current between the phases. Type designation

JEL 6 JEL 6 JEL 6 JEL 6 JEL 6

C10 C16 C25 C40 C50

Number of poles of the residual current device/circuit breaker

Breaking capacity (kA)

3 3 3 3 3

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

Sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

1.5 2.5 4.0 10.0 16.0

Rated current (A)

10 16 25 40 50

Leakage current IΔ n (30mА)

40310 40316 40325 40340 40363

Catalogue number Leakage Leakage Leakage current current current IΔ n (100mА) IΔ n (300mА) IΔ n (500mА)

40311 40317 40321 40341 40361

40313 40318 40323 40343 40336

40314 40319 40324 40344 40365

Package /Box (pcs)

3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60 3 / 60

Combined electronic residual current device 3P+N and circuit breakers 4P with breaking capacity of 4.5 kA. Compares the leakage current between the phases and earth or neutral. Type designation

JEL 6 JEL 6 JEL 6 JEL 6 JEL 6

C10 C16 C25 C40 C50

Number of poles of the residual current device/circuit breaker

Breaking capacity (kA)

4 4 4 4 4

4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5

Sections of the mounting conductors (mm2)

1.5 2.5 4.0 10.0 16.0

Rated current (A)

10 16 25 40 50

Leakage current IΔ n (30mА)

40411 40415 40425 40440 40465

Catalogue number Leakage Leakage Leakage current current current IΔ n (100mА) IΔ n (300mА) IΔ n (500mА)

40407 40445 40420 40404 40401

40408 40439 40428 40447 40436

40409 40438 40429 40446 40469

Package /Box (pcs)

2 / 40 2 / 40 2 / 40 2 / 40 2 / 40

Indirect protection devices Surge arresters SPD type

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN61 643-1 EN 61 643-1 The breakers are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”.

www.elmarkgroup.eu The surge arrestor consists of a semi-conductor valve element that opens at certain conditions. At normal conditions of the system, the surge arrestor has infinitely high resistance between the protected conductors and earthing circuit. At voltage increase due to atmospheric nature or system failure, the valve element opens and leads the excessive voltage to the grounded circuit. After reversion of the normal voltage the valve element closes. The arrestor can endure high momentary overloading. Functions: - protection of heavy-loaded electrical circuits from overload - used to protect not only particular consumers/circuits, but also the whole panel - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - control: automatic switching off at exit failure and recovery after eliminating the danger Technical data: * Rated operating voltage Uc: - the operating voltage of the surge arrester 275/440V; 50Hz * Surge voltage Up: the voltage created in surge arrester terminals at rated discharge current running: according to the tables B4 * Rated discharge current In – the rated value of discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20µs, which can be repeatedly led to the ground: according to the tables * Full discharge current Imax – the peak value of the discharge current with a sinusoid 8/20µs, which the surge arrester can bear once: according to the table * Constant operating current: up to 800μA for 1P, 2P and 3P; up to 600μA for 1P + N, 3P + N * Indication for damaged surge arrester * Offered in types: 1P; 1P + N; 3P; 3P + N Connecting: * flexible or rigid conductors with corresponding section Mounting: * on DIN-rail * mounting position: vertical - * mounting in the distribution box on the front or right before the breaker according to the attached schemes * Breakers plastic material of UV rays and non-flammable * Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 45Cْ * Installation altitude: up to 2000m

Three phase protection TN-C system consumer

Monophase protection TT system consumer

Three phase protection TN-S system consumer

Three phase protection IT system consumer

The surge arrester selection is made according to the overload risk level or atmosphere activity, named B, C or D (from high to low risk level). The company offers the following models of arresters: Model SPD – Bxxxx – for systems with exceptionally high risk level. Mounted mainly in the beginning of the installation or in the main panel. Model SPD – Cxxxx – for systems with high or average risk level. Mounted in the beginning of the installation or before the breaker. Model SPD – Dxxxx – for systems with low risk level. Suitable for secondary protection of consumers in combination with SPD – Bxxxx/SPD – Cxxxx

Indirect protection devices

Surge arresters SPD type

www.elmarkgroup.eu Type of the arrester

Uc (V)

Up (kV)

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs)

SPD-D5/1p

275

1.2

64101

17 / 170

SPD-C10/1p

275

1.2

64102

17 / 170

SPD-C20/1p

275

1.8

64103

17 / 170

SPD-B40/1p

275

64104

17 / 170

In (kA)

Imax (kA)

Uc (V)

Up (kV)

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs)

Type of the arrester

SPD-D5/1pN

275

1.2

64201

8 / 80

SPD-C10/1pN

275

1.2

64202

8 / 80

SPD-C20/1pN

275

1.8

64203

8 / 80

SPD-B40/1pN

275

64204

8 / 80

Type of the arrester

In (kA)

Imax (kA)

Uc (V)

Up (kV)

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs)

5 / 50

SPD-D5/3p

440

1.2

64301

SPD-C10/3p

440

1.2

64302

5 / 50

SPD-C20/3p

440

1.8

64303

5 / 50

SPD-B40/3p

440

64304

5 / 50

In (kA)

Imax (kA)

Uc (V)

Up (kV)

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs)

Type of the arrester

Imax (kA)

TNC

SPD-D5/3pN

440

1.2

64401

4 / 40

SPD-C10/3pN

440

1.2

64402

4 / 40

SPD-C20/3pN

440

1.8

64403

4 / 40

SPD-B40/3pN

440

64404

4 / 40

MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL

MACHINE PANEL

THREE PHASE CONSUMER

In (kA)

L1 L2 L3 N+PE 3xC61N-C63

3xC61N-C40

SPD-B40/3p

SPD-C20/3p

3xC61N-C40

SPD-C10/3p

THREE PHASE CONSUMER

TNS

C61N-C25

L1 L2

SPD-D5/1p

L3 N

MONO PHASE CONSUMER

PE 4xC61N-C40

SPD-C10/3pN

2xC61N-C25

SPD-D5/1pN

C D

MONO PHASE CONSUMER

Contactors Low voltage contactors LT 1 - D

BASE STATIC MAGNETIC CORE COIL REVERSE SPRING MOVABLE MAGNETIC CORE MOVABLE CONTACTS LID STATIC CONTACTS AUXILIARY CONTACT SCREWS TERMINAL PROTECTION CAPS

Contactors

Low voltage contactors LT 1 - D

www.elmarkgroup.eu

LT 1 D contactors are alternating current contactors for control of circuits and consumers operating in class AC3. It is suitable for consumers with rated current up to 95A. The contactors are offered in a type with 1 NO contact for operating circuit making and the models over 40A also have 1NC operating contactor. Functions: - switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil - making of control systems - used as an operating element in process control panels - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable separation of power contactors - secured cover of the movable part of the contactor Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 690V; 50/60Hz * Composition of the power contact surfaces: unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC * Coil material: pure copper type QA-1 * Magnetic core material: alloy steel type 360 * Moveable part material: Bakelite * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥1000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000 * Number of cycles per hour: 1200 UP TO 32A; 600 for 40-95A * Pole leaking power: up to 13W * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5° * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 60ْ C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60 947-4-1 The breakers are in accordance C1 with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”.

Type

LT1-D 09~32

LT1-D 40~95

LT-D 09~12 LT1 D18 LT1 D25 LT1 D32 LT1-D 40~65 LT1-D 80~95

Type

34/35

50/60

4.5

34/35

50/60

4.5

100/110

6.5

100/110

6.5

LT-D 09~12 LT1 D18 LT1 D25 LT1 D32 LT1-D 40~65 LT1-D 80~95

100

126

116

126

127

Contactors

Low voltage contactors LT 1 – D Type number

LT1 - D0910 1NO

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 4

Type number

5.5

7.5

Type number

5.5

7.5

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 7.5

Type number

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V

Type number

7.5

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 11

open

closed

open

closed

open

closed

open

closed

open

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

5.5

closed

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

Coil capacity (VA)

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 5.5

open

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

LT1 - D2510 1NO

closed

Coil capacity (VA)

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V

Type number

LT1 - D1801 1NC

5.5

Rated capacity (kW)

LT1 - D1810 1NO

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V

Type number

LT1 - D1201 1NC

Rated capacity (kW)

2.2

LT1 - D1210 1NO

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

2.2

LT1 - D0901 1NC

www.elmarkgroup.eu

closed

7.5

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

9А

1.7

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

9А

1.7

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

12 А

1.7

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

12 А

1.7

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

18 А

1.7

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

18 А

1.7

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

open

25 А

2.5

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23091 23092 23093 23094 23095 23096 23097

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23273 23270 23271 23272 23277 23278 23279

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23121 23122 23123 23124 23125 23126 23127

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23274 23280 23281 23282 23283 23284 23285

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23181 23182 23183 23184 23185 23186 23187

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23275 23286 23287 23288 23289 23290 23291

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23251 23252 23253 23254 23255 23256 23257

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Contactors

Low voltage contactors LT 1 – D

www.elmarkgroup.eu Type number

LT1 - D2501 1NC

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 5.5

Type number

LT1 - D3210 1NO

18.5

Type number

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 30

Type number

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 37

Type number

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 45

closed

open

200

closed

open

200

closed

open

200

closed

open

200

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

7.5

Section of the power supply conductor

25 А

2.5

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

open

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

closed

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

18.5

Coil capacity (VA)

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 22

7.5

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

open

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

LT1 - D9511 1NO+1NC

closed

Coil capacity (VA)

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V

Type number

LT1 - D8011 1NO+1NC

Rated capacity (kW)

LT1 - D6511 1NO+1NC

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V

Type number

LT1 - D5011 1NO+1NC

Rated capacity (kW)

7.5

LT1 - D4011 1NO+1NC

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

closed

open

200

32 А

2.5

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

40 А

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

50 А

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

65 А

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

80 А

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

95 А

Section of the power supply conductor

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23276 23292 23293 23294 23295 23296 23297

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23321 23322 23323 23324 23325 23326 23327

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23401 23402 23403 23404 23405 23406 23407

1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23501 23502 23503 23504 23505 23506 23507

1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23651 23652 23653 23654 23655 23656 23657

1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23801 23802 23803 23804 23805 23806 23807

1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23951 23952 23953 23954 23955 23956 23957

1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15 1 / 15

Contactors

Low voltage contactors LT 1 - H K/D

Документация на която съответства изделието: Стандарт EN 60947-1 EN 60947-4-1

LT 1-HK/D series of contactors are intended for control of circuits and consumers under the application category of AC2 where consumers work at the rated current and voltage, or such with less frequent starts at rated currents of up to 32A. Contactors are supplied with one control contact and three power contacts. They are not recommended for control of AC motors. Functions: - switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil - making of control systems - used as an operating element in process control panels - secured cover of the movable part of the contactor - not suitable for AC motor control; Technical data: * Operation class: AC 2 * Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 690V; 50/60Hz * Power contacts material: pure copper with a coating of 70% Ag20%NiCrO * Surge voltage wear resistance: >6000V * Rated voltage of the coil: from 12 to 400V AC * Coil material: pure copper type QA-1 * Magnetic core material: alloy steel type 470 * Moveable part material: fireproof plastic * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥200000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥500000 * Number of cycles per hour: 1200 UP TO 32A; 600 for 40-95A * Pole leaking power: up to 13W * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5° * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 60ْ C * Altitude: up to 2000m

LT-K 06~12 LT1 D18 LT1 D25 LT1 D32

LT1-H K/D 06~32

Type number

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V

Type

34/35

4.5

LT-K 06~12

34/35

50/60

4.5

100

Type

www.elmarkgroup.eu

closed

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

open

LT 1 - НK 0610 1NO 1.5

2.2

Type number

2.2

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V

closed

6А

1.7

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

open

LT1 - НK 0910 1NC 2.2

3.7

9А

1.7

LT1 D18 LT1 D25 LT1 D32

Coil voltage (V)

230 400 12 24 36 48 110 Coil voltage (V)

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

Catalogue number

Package/Box

23061E 23062E 23063E 23064E 23065E 23066E 23067E

1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100

Catalogue number

Package/Box

23091E 23092E 23093E 23094E 23095E 23096E 23097E

1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100

Contactors

Low voltage contactors LT 1 - H K/D

www.elmarkgroup.eu Type number

LT 1 -НK 1210 1NO

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 3

Type number

LT 1 - HD 1810 1NO

7.5

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 11

Type number

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 11

Type number

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V 15

closed

open

closed

open

closed

7.5

closed

7.5

18.5

closed

7.5

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

12 А

1.7

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

18 А

1.7

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

18 А

1.7

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

open

25 А

2.5

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

open

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

7.5

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

5.5

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

5.5

open

Coil capacity (VA)

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V

Type number

LT 1 - НD 3210 1NO

closed

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

LT 1 - НD 2501 1NC

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 690V

Type number

LT 1 - НD 2510 1NO

Rated capacity (kW)

LT 1 - НD 1801 1NC

Coil capacity (VA)

Rated capacity (kW)

25 А

2.5

Rated current Tightening in AC-3 440V to up moment (N.m)

Section of the power supply conductor

open

32 А

2.5

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23121E 23122E 23123E 23124E 23125E 23126E 23127E

1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23181E 23182E 23183E 23184E 23185E 23186E 23187E

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23275E 23286E 23287E 23288E 23289E 23290E 23291E

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23251E 23252E 23253E 23254E 23255E 23256E 23257E

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23276E 23292E 23293E 23294E 23295E 23296E 23297E

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23321E 23322E 23323E 23324E 23325E 23326E 23327E

1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50 1 / 50

Contactors

Low voltage contactors LT 1 - F

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The contactors LT 1- F are alternating current contactors used to control circuits and consumers operating in normal working conditions with switching on /off the consumer and dirty working environment. They are suitable for consumers with electrical power consumption from 115A to 800A. Functions: - frequently switching on/off heavy-loaded electrical circuits at controlling signal to the coil - making of systems for consumers’ control - used as an operating element in process control panels - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable separation of power contactors - secured cover of the movable part of the contactor Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * Rated operating voltage of power contactors: up to 1000V; 50/60Hz * Composition of the power contact surfaces: unalloyed copper with coating 80% AgSnO * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Coil composition: pure coil copper QA-1 type * Magnetic core composition: steel alloy 360 * Movable part composition: bakelite * Rated voltage of the coil: 230 and 400V AC * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors - rail * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000 * Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: 200 * Pole leaking power: from 16 to 80W * Mounting: - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 10°C * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10°C + 60°C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60 947-4-1 The breakers are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”.

Dimensions (mm): Ty[e

LT 1 F150

163.5

170

171

107

150

57.5

LT 1 F225

168.5

197

181

113.5

172

51.5

LT 1 F265

201.5

203

181

141

178

66.5

LT 1 F400

213

206

219

145

182

LT 1 F630

309

304

255

155

264

LT 1 F800

309

304

255

155

264

Motor rated capacity (kW)

Type number

Coil capacity (VA)

220V 380V 660V 230V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V 1000V LT1 - F115 LT1 - F115

closed

open

Rated current in AC-3 440V to up

Tightening moment (N.m)

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

230 400 12 24 36 48 110 230 400 12 24 36 48 110 230 400 12 24 36 48 110 230 400 12 24 36 48 110

23111 23112 23113 23114 23115 23116 23117 23151 23152 23153 23154 23155 23156 23157 23861 23862 23863 23864 23865 23866 23867 23261 23262 23263 23264 23265 23266 23267

Package / Box ( pcs )

660

115 A

LT1 - F150 LT1 - F150

100

660

150 A

LT1 - F225 LT1 - F225

110

129

100

660

225 A

LT1 - F265 LT1 - F265

132

140

160

147

966

265 A

LT1 - F400 LT1 - F400

110

200

220

250

257

280

185

966

400 A

230 400

23751 23752

1/1

LT1 - F630 LT1 - F630

200

335

375

400

450

630 A

230 400

23771 23772

1/1

LT1 - F800 LT1 - F800

250

450

475

450

800 A

230 400

23881 23882

1/1

Note: At mounting the containers from the series in control schemes a distance must be provided at the side of the contactor in case of eventual coil change.

1/4

1/2

Contactors Low voltage contactors with direct current coil LP 1-D

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60947-1 EN 60947-4-1

C4 The products are in accordance

with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”.

The contactors LP1 D are alternating current contactors with constant current coil for control. The power plugs of the contactor are designed for control of alternating current circuits and consumers operating in normal operating class AC-3 with frequently switching on/off the consumer and dirty working environment. The contactors are suitable for consumers with electrical power consumption from 9A to 225A. Functions: - switching on/off alternating current consumers in direct current controlling schemes at controlling signal to the coil - making of systems for consumers’ control - used as an operating element in process control panels - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable separation of power contacts - secured cover of the movable part of the contactor Technical data: * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: from 12V DC to 220V DC * Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V DC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000 * Number of cycles per hour: 1200 up to 32A; 600 for 40-95A * Pole leaking power: up to 13W * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10ْ C + 60ْ C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Dimensions:

LP1-D 09~95

Type

A (mm)

LP 1 D0910 LP 1 D1210 LP 1 D1810 LP 1 D2510 LP 1 D3210 LP 1 D4011 LP 1 D5011 LP 1 D6511 LP 1 D9511 LP 1 F115 LP 1 F150 LP 1 F225

47 47 47 57 57 77 77 77 87

Type

LP 1 D0910 LP 1 D1210 LP 1 D1810 LP 1 D2510 LP 1 D3210 LP 1 D4011 LP 1 D5011 LP 1 D6511 LP 1 D9511 LP 1 F115 LP 1 F150 LP 1 F225

B (mm)

76 76 76 86 86 129 129 129 129

Rated current (А)

Auxiliary contact (pcs.)

230V

9 12 18 25 32 40 50 65 95 115 150 225

1NO 1NO 1NO 1NO 1NO 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC 1NO 1NO 1NO

2.20 3.00 4.00 5.50 7.50 11.0 15.0 18.5 25.0 30.0 40.0 63.0

C (mm)

a (mm)

95 95 95 101 101 176 176 176 182

34/35 34/35 34/35 40 40 40 40 40 40

Rated capacity of the consumer (kW) 400V 415V 440V 690V

4.00 5.50 7.50 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0 45.0 55.0 75.0 110

4.00 5.50 7.50 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0 45.0 59.0 80.0 110

5.50 7.50 10.0 15.0 18.5 30.0 33.0 37.0 45.0 80.0 100 129

b (mm.)

50/60 50/60 50 50 50 100 100 100 100

Catalogue number according to the coil voltage (V DC) 12

23962 23963 23964 23925 23966 23967 23968 23969 23970 23911 23912 23913

23098 23128 23188 23258 23328 23408 23508 23658 23958 23118 23158 23228

23130 23131 23132 23133 23134 23135 23136 23137 23138 23914 23915 23916

23971 23972 23973 23974 23975 23976 23977 23978 23979 23917 23918 23919

110

23980 23981 23982 23983 23984 23985 23986 23987 23988 23989 23990 23994

230

23139 23140 23141 23142 23143 23144 23145 23146 23147 23148 23149 23201

Contactors AC contactor for switching on of capacitors CJ19-43

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60947-1 EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”.

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The AC contactors CJ19-43 are specially designed electrical devices for commutation of three phase capacitors used for power correction. They are alternating current contactor LT1 Dxx with mounted a group for peak current lowering from the transitional process of the capacitor’s switching on/off. This group is a combination of current limiting resistors, switched on in the beginning of the transitional process (switching on/off of the capacitor group). The contactors are suitable for capacitors with rate up to 50 kVAr. Functions: - switching on/off of capacitors for reactive power compensation - making of systems for compensation of the energy reactive component - lowering of the peak transitional currents at switching on/off of the capacitor - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable separation of power contacts - secured part of the contactor against consumer contact - do not allow manual operation Technical data: * Operation class: AC 6 * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60Hz * Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC C5 * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Number of the contacts: 3 NO power contacts +1NO operative * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥300000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥1000000 * Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to 600 * Pole leaking power: up to 13W * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 60ْ C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Dimensions

Type number

CJ19-32 DPK CJ19-32 DPK CJ19-40 DPK CJ19-40 DPK CJ19-65 DPK CJ19-65 DPK CJ19-95 DPK CJ19-95 DPK CJ19-115 DPK CJ19-150 DPK CJ19-170 DPK

Type

A (mm)

B (mm)

C (mm)

D (mm)

CJ19-32 DPK CJ19-40 DPK CJ19-65 DPK CJ19-95 DPK CJ19-115DPK CJ19-150DPK CJ19-170DPK

56 75 85 85

74 127 127 127

130 180 200 200

150 150 157 157

Rated capacity of the consumer (kVAr) 690V 400/440V

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs )

230 400 230 400 230 400 230 400 230 230 230

23932 23910 23900 23940 23961 23965 23909 23995 23991 23992 23993

1/20 1/20 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/16 1/4 1/4 1/4

Rated current (A)

32 32 40 40 65 65 95 95 115 150 170

8 8 12.5 12.5 25 25 30 30 35 40 50

12.5 12.5 15 15 30 30 36 36 40 50 60

Contactors Reverse contactors LT 4-Dxx

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN60947-1, EN 60947-4-1

C6 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”.

LT 4-Dxx series contactors are specially designed electromagnetic devices for commutation of three phase induction motor with reversing controlling scheme. They represent two alternating current contactors LT 4-Dxx series factory mechanically joined together. The mechanical joining also provides locking of the contactors against simultaneous switching on. The contactor is used for reverse control of induction motors with shortly joined rotor. The contactors from the series are offered for consumers up to 95A. Functions: - switching on of electrical motors in one direction of rotation and reversing of the rotation direction at outside command - making of control systems - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable switching on or separation of power contacts - secured part of the contactors against consumer contact - secured cover of the movable part of the contactor - impossibility for simultaneous switching on of the two contactors from the group due to mechanical locking Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60 Hz * Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Limits of the controlling coil voltage: from 0.8 to 1.15 Uc * Number of plugs: 3 NO power contacts +1NO operative (for contactors over 40A there is also additional 1NC contact) * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors Note: The contactors are offered without fabric cabling * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥1 000 000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10 000 000 * Number of cycles (switching on) per hour: up to 600 * Pole leaking power: up to 13W * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - with bolts to the surface - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 60ْ C * Altitude: up to 2000m Dimensions Type number

Type number

Rated current (A)

LT 4 D1810

A (mm)

B (mm)

C (mm)

LT 4 - D1810

100

LT 4 - D2510

130

LT 4 - D3210

130

105

LT 4 - D4011

167

126

116

LT 4 - D6511

167

126

116

LT 4 - D9511

182

127

Catalogue number

Box / Carton (pcs)

Rated capacity of the consumer (kW) 230V

400V

415V

440V

690V

7.5

23301

1 / 20

23302

1 / 20

LT 4 D2510

5.5

LT 4 D3210

7.5

18.5

23303

1 / 20

LT 4 D4011

18.5

23304

1/ 8

23305

1/8

23306

1/6

LT 4 D6511

18.5

LT 4 D9511

Contactors Auxiliary contact blocks

www.elmarkgroup.eu Auxiliary contacts At necessity the element provide auxiliary number of contacts. They are specially designed for mounting on the movable part of the magnetic core of the contactors LT 1K/D series. Functions: - extending the number of the operative contactors up to 4 in different Combinations - switches on simultaneously with the other contact system of the contactor

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60 947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”.

Catalogue №23311

Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * insulation voltage: 690V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Mounting: - on the movable cover of the contactor through pinching - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material)

Type

LT01-DN02 LT01-DN11 LT01-DN20 LT01-DN22 LT01-DN40 LT01-DN04 LT01-KN11 LA1-KN22

Number of contacts

2NC

NO+NC

2NO

2NO+2NC

4NO

4NC

NO+NC

2NO+2NC

Catalogue number

23002

23011

23020

23022

23040

23004

23001

23003

Auxiliary contacts LT03-DN11 Providing on necessity additional number of plug points and are mounted sideward to the movable part of the magnetic cores of contactors of the series LT1 D. Variants with two additional plug points NO and NC are offered. Functions: - expanding the number of the operational plug points - switching on simultaneously with the rest of the contact system of the contactor Technical characteristics: * Environment operational regime: АС 3 * Insulation voltage: 690V * Double connector: screw connector * Connection: - flexible conductors with or without cable end - solid conductors * Mounting method: - mounting position – sideward to the contactor * Plastic: resistant to UV and non-burning (self-extinguishing material) Time delay contact block LT02-Dxx LT02-Dxx is designed to set time intervals from 0.1 to 180s in different control schemes. It is used most frequently in combination with contactors from LT1-Dxx series to form “star/delta” starters for electrical motor control, as it provides the necessary time for motor winding. Type

LТ02-DT0

LТ02-DT2

LТ02-DT4

Number of contacts

N0+NC

Time delay

0.1~3s

0.1~30s

10~180s

23901

23902

23903

Catalogue number

Contactors Module contactors K series

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Modular contactors K series are used for commutation of mono-phase and three-phase low power electrical consumers. They provide connection between the consumers in small overall dimensions, silent work, mounting only at DIN-rails.

K20

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60669-2-3 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”.

Functions: - switching on of consumers - making of control systems - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - reliable switching on or separation of power contacts Technical data: * Operation class: AC 3 * Rated operating voltage of the controlling coil: 230V AC; 50/60 Hz * Rated operating voltage of the power circuit: up to 690V AC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: >8000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible conductors with or without cable terminal - rigid conductors * Mounting: - on DIN-rail or - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5° * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10°C + 60°C * Altitude: up to 2000m

À1

À2

Type

Coil voltage (V)

Contacts

Catalogue number

K20 K20 K20 K40 K40

20A 20A 20A 40A 40A

230V 230V 230V 230V 230V

2NO NO+NC 2NC 2NO+2NC 4NO

23008 23007 23009 23422 23409

K40

2NO À1

À2

À1

À2

4NO 27.5

NO+NC

2NC 1

2NO+2NC

Capacity coefficient compensation Complex compensating devices

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Complex compensating devices The use of electrical energy in industry is invariably connected with its transformation. The development of semiconductor elements and the broader coming of semi-conductor transformers, frequency control, welding machines and electrical arc furnaces in industrial projects have a negative impact over the electrical power quality in the electro distributing systems. Induction machines need reactive energy to create electromagnetic field. The reactive component of current is taken from the electro distributing systems but it leads to additional losses in the power supply system and makes shorter the exploitation term of electrical devices. This leads to curving of the sinusoid form of current and voltage and interferences with harmonic character. Compensating the reactive power means to fill up the system in such a way that the needed reactive power to be created from the compensating device instead of being taken from the electro transportation system. This leads to killing the voltage fall and cable losses and increasing the outlet power of the power transporters and cutting down the bills for overconsumption of reactive energy paid by consumers to the electricity supply company. In practice compensating the reactive energy and high harmonics through LC filters combined in compensating installations has the broadest spreading. There are several types of compensation according to their location: * individual compensation – when to every single motor or consumer is mounted a compensating system. It is applied to powerful motors and transformers with fixed capacity. * installation compensation – when the consumers from the whole section (workshop) are grouped and compensation D1 is accomplished for the whole section. * overall compensation – accomplished at full compensation in the inlet of the installation. According to the type of the compensating devices compensation can be: * passive – when the system supplies constant reactive power. In this case the system does not react to changes in the size and nature of the harmonic components and also to the per cent increase of the reactive energy in time. * active – broader spread. The system controls the form of the consumed current and generates different capacity depending on the load changes. When designing the electro distributing system of industrial projects the following tasks are taken into consideration: * defining the factor of non-sinusoid of the consumers and the voltage harmonic components * defining the additional loading of the capacitor batteries from the harmonic components and calculating the filtering elements if needed The calculation of the compensating device capacity is done by reading the reactive energy of the system and the working time of the system. Compensating devices represent a device of one or several metal boxes with common rail system, automatic regulator for cosφ control RPSF-xx series, different number of capacitor batteries (according to the capacity of the device) with different capacity HY 111 series, contactors for capacitor batteries control CJ 19-43 series, protective elements, etc. The broadest spreading of compensation has acquired the compensation of harmonics and reactive energy with capacitors for high voltage. Capacitors HY 111 series are voltage remeasured and are able to endure overload from harmonic components up to 7% from the basic harmonics. They are used in systems with high harmonics foul up to 25%. The high harmonics composition is defined after measuring the influence rate of each separate harmonics compared to the first one. In Bulgaria mostly spread are 5, 7, 9, 11 and 13 harmonics. The capacitors are remeasured for voltage 415V and are normally mounted right in the compensation systems. When the high harmonics are over 25% the system is taken to be foul and in this case except using capacitors, filters for leveling the harmonics are to be used as well. These filters are calculated on the basis of the corresponding voltage harmonics and differ for the different harmonics. They are calculated using complex mathematical programme which reads the foul rate, the significance per cent of the voltage harmonic component, etc.

Capacity coefficient compensation Capacitor batteries and cosφ regulator

www.elmarkgroup.eu Capacitor batteries for reactive energy compensation

Capacitor batteries HY 111 series are specially designed three phase dry capacitors for compensation of reactive energy and correction of the capacity factor. It represents an aluminum cylindrical body in which a metal polypropylene folio is mounted which does not require special impregnation. The permittivity characteristics are acquired through filling with a special mixture on a vegetable base (resins). The capacitor battery is constructed in such a way that at failure (overload from voltage, current or temperature) breaks the connection to the upper cover where are the connections to the power supply. This is done by a specially constructed valve for overpressure mounted right above the capacitor element. The breaking of the inner couplings provides protection to the staff and environment from damage due to capacitor element failure. There is a three phase capacitor in the cylindrical body with built in resistor for rarefying the capacitors. The capacitor battery can be used both for passive and active compensation. Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60831-1 EN 60831-2

Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 440V; 50Hz * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute * Capacity: from 8 to 30 kVAr at 440V * Tolerance: ±5% * Operating temperature: -40 - +55C ْ * Capacity losses: 0.5W/kVAr * Built in discharging resistance * Admissible current overload: twice as much the peak current * Discharge time: <50V per minute * Altitude: 2000m Mounting: * With bolt M12 orM16 to a flat horizontal base

Type of the battery

Dimensions H / Ø (mm)

Operating voltage (V)

HY 111A8 HY 111A12 HY 111A15 HY 111A20 HY 111A30

230 / 80 230 / 85 230 / 85 240 / 115 280 / 115

440 440 440 440 440

Battery capacity Catalogue number (kVAr)

8.0 12.5 15.0 20.0 30.0

49008 49012 49015 49020 49030

Type of the battery

Dimensions H / Ø (mm)

Operating voltage (V)

Battery capacity (kVAr)

Catalogue number

HY 111B12* HY 111B25*

230 / 85 280 / 115

690 690

12.5 25

49031 49032

Note: *Suitable for wind generators

Controller for automatic regulation of the capacity factor (cosφ regulator) The automatic regulators of the capacity factor RPCF-xx series are devices for monitoring of low voltage systems and control of switching on of capacitor batteries for the capacity factor compensation. There is possibility for adjustment of the system parameters and control. Manufactured by the latest CMOS technology, they are distinguished with high degree of data security, easy programming and secure control of the outlets. There is possibility for indication and setting the parameters of the power supply system as: capacity coefficient, display of the system parameters such as voltage, current and capacity, losses, protection against overload, overload indication or lack of voltage, etc. The change of parameters is performed through a combination of buttons on the front panel. There is light diode to indicate which parameter is being displayed on the screen and which outlets are in operation. The display is four digital. There is possibility for choice of the working conditions: manual or automatic.

Type

HY-RPCF12 HY-RPCF16

Number of steps

Catalogue number

49120

49160

Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V * Operating frequency: 45 – 65Hz * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV per minute * Measurement range: from 0 to 9999kVAr * Measurement accurateness: - voltage: ±1.0% - current: ±1.0% - capacity coefficient: ±1.0% - reactive energy: ±2.0% * Operating temperature: -10-+55°C * Humidity: 30 – 60% * Display: 4 digital * Responsiveness: 20mA * Outlet: 7A * Number of outlets: 12 and 16 * Altitude: up to 2500m Mounting: * Оn the front panel of the box through cutting an opening

Capacity coefficient compensation 61

Filters for harmonics and metal boxes

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Filters for harmonics In the cases when the standard given in EN 50160 is not kept it is necessary to use a filtering system made of a capacitor battery and connected to it inductivity in series. The parameters of the filtering element are defined according to the rate of the given harmonics and are different for each one. The theoretical parameters of the filtering inductivity for the given capacitor batteries for voltage 440V are presented in table 1. Table1 Battery 12kVAr

Battery 20kVAr

Harmonics inductivity (H)

Battery 8kVAr

2.741x10-3

1.754x10-3

1.462x10-3

1.096x10-3

8.771x10-4

7.309x10-4

-3

-4

3.729x10-4

-4

1.398x10

Battery 15 kVAr

8.950x10

7.459x10

5.594x10

-4

4.475x10

8.420x10-4

5.414x10

4.512x10

3.384x10

2.707x10

2.256x10-4

L11

5.663x10-4

3.625x10-4

3.020x10-4

2.265x10-4

1.812x10-4

1.510x10-4

L13

-4

1.081x10-4

2.595x10

-4

Battery 30kVAr

4.055x10

-4

Battery 25kVAr

2.163x10

1.622x10

1.298x10

Note: At order we define the practical parameters of the filtering elements for each capacitor system in order to improve the capacity factor and minimize the consumed active and reactive energy in harmonics one.

On the basis of its production experience ELMARK offers filters for harmonics of seventh harmonic, which are presented in table 2 Table2 7th harmonic inductance (H)

Battery 8kVAr

Battery 12kVAr

Battery 15 kVAr

Battery 20kVAr

Battery 25kVAr

Battery 30kVAr

Catalogue number

49708

49712

49715

49720

49725

49730

Metal boards for making of systems for capacity factor correction Metal boards for capacitor batteries mounting made of specially processed sheet iron with protective surface. A fan is mounted to provide temperature conditions. There is possibility a breaker to be mounted on the door. The device is protected against indirect contact to the current leading elements. It is mounted directly on the walls or floor, as at mounting on a wall it is fixed with screws to the surface. It necessary to provide enough distance for cooling of the board.

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60439-1 EN 60439-2

Technical data: * Rated voltage: 400V; 50Hz * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance: 6kV/m * Operating temperature: -5-+55C Ů&#x2019; * Maximum overloading current: 1.3xIn * Surface: zinc passivation * Colour: RAL 7032 * Altitude: up to 2500m Mounting: * on vertical or horizontal surfaces Dimensions Type

L (mm)

H (mm)

W (mm)

Catalogue number

CXF550/356/225

550

356

225

49225

CXF1140/450/450

1140

450

49450

CXF1730/600/600

1730

600

49600

Note: The boards are supplied with a cooling fan

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Thermal relays

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) E1 no. 89/336 EEC”.

Thermal relays The thermal relays LT 2- K/Exx series are devices designed for protection of induction motors from overload or overheat. They are mounted to contactors LT 1 K/Dxx series and an operating circuit for motor control is passed through their NC contacts. The operation of these devices is based on the curving of bimetal plates mounted in the thermal relay caused by the current passing through them. When the current to the consumer gets higher due to failure, the thermal current gets higher which leads to additional curving of the bimetal plates and at getting above the limit value for the plate it pushes the breaking mechanism and breaks the operating circuit. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. Functions: - switching off alternating current consumers at current overload - making of control systems for consumers - used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz * Rated operating current range: up to 690V AC * insulation voltage: >690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer - to the contactor through the relay terminals - the connecting terminals with the consumer can be adjusted according to the type of the contactor * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥1000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000 * Indication for protection activating * Possibility for choice of the protection restoring (through the blue button) * Possibility for range adjustment of the protection activating * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * Mounting: - mounting to the contactor: to the terminals of the contactor as it is additionally clamped to its frame through a pin - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 60ْ C * Installation altitude: up to 2000m Note: To protect the consumer from short circuit, before the combination contactor- thermal relay, a suitably measured breaker or safety device should be mounted.

Connecting scheme LT 2 Exx control buttons

hour 2h 1h 40 mm 20 mm 10 mm

4 mm 2 mm 1 mm

Dimensions

40 s 20 s

Type

a (mm)

b (mm)

LT 2 - Kxx

LT 2 - E13xx

LT 2 - E23xx

LT 2 - E33xx

115

10 s

1s 0.8 s 0.8

x value (Ir)

c (mm)

m (mm)

x (mm)

y (mm)

v (mm)

z (mm)

10.7

108

109

9.5

124

109

17 20

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Thermal relays For contactor LT1-K06 type

LT2-K0301 LT2-K0302 LT2-K0303 LT2-K0304 LT2-K0305 LT2-K0306 LT2-K0307 LT2-K0308 LT2-K0310 LT2-K0312 LT2-K0314 LT2-K0316 LT2-K0321 LT2-K0322

For contactors from LT1-D09 to LT1-D25 type

LT2-E1301 LT2-E1302 LT2-E1303 LT2-E1304 LT2-E1305 LT2-E1306 LT2-E1307 LT2-E1308 LT2-E1310 LT2-E1312 LT2-E1314 LT2-E1316 LT2-E1321 LT2-E1322 LT2-E1353

For contactor LT1-D32 type

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Motor capacity (kW) 220V 230V

380V 400V

660V 690V

0.37 0.75 1.10 1.10 2.20 3.70 4.00 5.50

0.37 0.75 1.50 2.20 2.20 4.00 5.50 7.50 7.50

0.37 0.55 1.10 1.50 3.00 4.00 4.00 7.50 11.0 15.0 15.0

Motor capacity (kW) 220V 230V

380V 400V

660V 690V

0.37 0.75 1.10 2.00 2.20 3.70 4.00 5.50 9.00

0.37 0.75 1.50 2.20 3.70 4.00 5.50 7.50 9.00 11.0

0.37 0.55 1.10 1.50 3.00 4.00 5.50 7.50 11.0 15.0 18.5 18.5

Motor capacity (kW)

Rated current (A)

0.16 0.25 0.40 0.63 1.00 1.60 2.50 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.0 13.0 18.0 25.0

Rated current (A)

0.16 0.25 0.40 0.63 1.00 1.60 2.50 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.0 13.0 18.0 25.0 33.0

Rated current (A)

Protection adjustment range

0.10 - 0.16 0.16 - 0.25 0.25 - 0.40 0.40 - 0.63 0.63 - 1.00 1.0 - 1.60 1.6 - 2.50 2.5 - 4.00 4.0 - 6.00 5.5 - 8.00 7.0 - 10.0 9.0 - 13.0 12.0 - 18.0 17.0 - 25.0

Protection adjustment range

0.10 - 0.16 0.16 - 0.25 0.25 - 0.40 0.40 - 0.63 0.63 - 1.00 1.0 - 1.60 1.6 - 2.50 2.5 - 4.00 4.0 - 6.00 5.5 - 8.00 7.0 - 10.0 9.0 - 13.0 12.0 - 18.0 17.0 - 25.0 23.0 - 32.0

Protection adjustment range

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs )

13401 13402 13403 13404 13405 13406 13407 13408 13410 13411 13412 13413 13414 13415

1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs )

13001 13002 13003 13004 13005 13006 13007 13008 13010 13012 13014 13016 13021 13022 13053

1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100 1 / 100

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs )

380V 400V

440V

660V 690V

LT2-E2353

18.5

23.0 - 32.0

13253

1 / 100

LT2-E2355

22.0

28.0 - 36.0

13255

1 / 100

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs )

For contactors from LT1-D40 to LT1-D95 type

Motor capacity (kW)

Rated current (A)

Protection adjustment range

380V 400V

440V

660V 690V

LT2-E3355

18.5

30.0 - 40.0

13355

1 / 50

LT2-E3357

37.0 - 50.0

13357

1 / 50

LT2-E3359

48.0 - 65.0

13359

1 / 50

LT2-E3363

63.0 - 80.0

13363

1 / 50

LT2-E3365

80.0 - 93.0

13365

1 / 50

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Dimensions

Auxiliary contact

UVR

Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2 The thermomagnetic automatic breakers TM 2-Exx series are devices designed for control and protection of induction motors from overload, overheat or short circuit. The overload motor protection is carried out by the built in the breaker thermal elements, and the short circuit protection is carried out by the magnetic elements. These magnetic elements allow the adjustment of the current leakage which is 13 times the maximum current of the thermal protection. The overload protection elements include automatic compensation for the ambient temperature changes. In combination with under voltage release the thermomagnetic breaker TM 2-Exx also provides protection of the motors from fall out of a phase from the power supply. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. Functions: - switching off alternating current consumers at current overload - switching off the electrical circuit to the consumer at inlet short circuit - protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase voltage (if there is under voltage release) - used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics - possibility for change/choice of the protection current (according to the operating current of the motor) - automatic compensation of the ambient temperature Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: up to 690V AC; 50/60 Hz * Rated operating current range: from 0.1 to 80A according to the type in table 1 * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer - to the contactor through the relay terminals - the connecting terminals with the consumer can be adjusted according to the type of the contactor * Electrical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥1000000 * Mechanical wear resistance (number of cycles):≥10000000 * Indication for protection activating * Switching on of the breaker manually with button “I” and switching off with button “O” manually or automatically at failure or after activating of the protection * Possibility for range adjustment of the protection activating * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * Possibility for independent operation or as an element of an automation system * Mounting: - mounting to DIN-rail - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 60ْ C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Type number

Magnetic segment Thermal protection current (A) adjustment range

Rated capacity of three-phase motor in AC-3 category

220V 230V

400V 415V

440V

500V

690V

TM2-E02

0.06

TM2-E03

0.06

0.09

TM2-E04

0.12

0.18

TM2-E05

0.09

0.25

0.37

TM2-E06

0.18

0.37

TM2-E07

0.37

0.75

TM2-E08

0.55

1.10

TM2-E10

1.10

TM2-E14

1.50

TM2-E16

2.20

TM2-E20

4.00

TM2-E21

5.50

TM2-E01

Thermal current Ithe TM2-E

Catalogue number

Package / Box ( pcs )

1 / 50

Đ?

1.5

0.1 - 0.16

0.16

48001

2.4

0.16 - 0.25

0.25

48002

1 / 50

5.0

0.25 - 0.40

0.40

48003

1 / 50

0.37

8.0

0.40 - 0.63

0.63

48004

1 / 50

0.55

13.0

0.63 - 1.00

48005

1 / 50

0.37

0.75

22.5

1 - 1.60

1.6

48006

1 / 50

0.75

1.10

1.50

33.5

1.6 - 2.50

2.5

48007

1 / 50

1.50

2.20

51.0

2.5 - 4.00

48008

1 / 50

2.20

3.00

4.00

78.0

4 - 6.30

6.3

48010

1 / 50

3.00

4.00

5.50

138

6 - 10.0

48014

1 / 50

5.50

7.50

9.00

170

9 - 14.0

48016

1 / 50

7.50

9.00

15.0

223

13 - 18.0

48020

1 / 50

9.00

11.0

18.5

327

17 - 23.0

48021

1 / 50

TM2-E22

5.50

11.0

15.0

22.0

327

20 - 25.0

48022

1 / 50

TM2-E32

7.50

15.0

18.5

22.0

416

24 - 32.0

48032

1 / 50

TM2-E40

11.0

18.5

22.0

25.0

33.0

480

25 - 40.0

48040

1 / 15

TM2-E63

15.0

30.0

33.0

40.0

55.0

550

40 - 63.0

48063

1 / 15

TM2-E80

22.0

40.0

45.0

55.0

63.0

665.5

56 - 80.0

48080

1 / 15

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors

Auxiliary devices for thermomagnetic automatic breaker TM 2

www.elmarkgroup.eu

For increasing the effectiveness of the thermomagnetic breakers TM 2-Exx operation, they can be supplied with auxiliary devices, designed for widening the practice range and improving the technical characteristics of the breakers

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60 947-2; EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”.

Voltage release (VR) for TM 2 The release is designed to switch off the thermomagnetic breaker when the controlling voltage falls under breaking level 0.55 to 0.7 UN and does not allow switching on of the breaker unless the voltage is over 0.85 Un. Functions: - switching off the breaker at power supply voltage fall under 0.55 – 0.7 Un - does not allow switching on of the breaker when the power supply voltage is under 0.85 Un - prevents unwarranted secondary start of the breaker at falling off and restoring of the power supply voltage - protects the motor at lack/lowering of the phase voltage - used as a protective operating element in control panels of induction motors - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Mounting: * laterally to a breaker * At the side of the breaker through special openings

Type

ТМ2 АU225 ТМ3 АU385

Voltage (V)

230 400

Catalogue number

48099 48098

Watertight box for TM 2-E Specially designed plastic box with silicon screen for increasing the IP code from dust and moisture to IP 65. Designed for thermal-magnetic circuit breakers of up to 32A * Mounting: - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ - mounted to horizontal surfaces (walls) with bolts - the breaker TM2 Exx is fixed inside of it on rail * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) Catalogue number 8083

Auxiliary contact block TM2 AE11 It is designed to switch on operational systems or signalization. Designed with one NO and one NC contact. It changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched on/off) to which it is mounted. * Mounting: - laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) 21 22 * Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 60ْ C * Altitude: up to 2000m 13

Catalogue number 48912

Auxiliary contact block TM2 AN11 It is designed to switch on operational circuits or signalization. It is designed with one NO and one NC contact. It changes the position of its contacts according to the position of the breaker (switched on/off) to which it is mounted. * Mounting: - laterally to a breaker TM2-Exx - more than 5 auxiliary contact blocks can be mounted * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10°C + 60°C * Altitude: up to 2000m Type

Catalogue number

ТМ2 АN11 ТМ3 АN11

48911 48913

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors

Starters for direct start

www.elmarkgroup.eu The electromagnetic starters LT 5 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control and protection of induction motors or other electrical consumers. They are a combination of contactors LT 1 Dxx series and thermal protection LT 2 Exx fabric cabled. The starters are offered on the market in metal or plastic boxes with the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture. At mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors. If necessary, at client’s order the fabric mounted thermal protection in the pneumatic starter can be substituted. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation.

3/L3

2/L2

1/L1

KM 1=LT1- Dxx

KM 1

LT2-Exx

KM 1 A1

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”.

Functions: - switching on/off alternating current consumers - does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage - protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Technical data: * Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 230/400V AC; 50/60 Hz Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives. * Rated operating voltage: 690V * Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V E4 * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Little power consumption and small dimensions * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to the motor power - two by two inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables * Possibility for range adjustment of the protection activating * IP code: IP 44 * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * Metal corpus: corrosion-proof coating * Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 60ْ C * Altitude: up to 2000m

L2/N

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Starters for direct start

www.elmarkgroup.eu Type number

Rated capacity of motors 50/60Hz AC-3 category

Rated current (A)

Thermal relay adjustment range

7 .. 10A

220V / 230V 380V / 400V 415V / 440V

LT5 D093 LT5 D123 LT5 D185

2.2

4.0

3.0

5.5

4.0

7.5

4.0 5.5 9.0

12 18

9 .. 13A 12 .. 18A

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue Package number / Box

230

43091

1 / 16

400

43092

1 / 16

230

43121

1 / 16

400

43122

1 / 16

230

43181

1 / 16

400

43182

1 / 16

Remark : Under request the thermal relay will be replaced 120

140

2 x PE13

166 2 x PE13

2x Æ 5.5

88 150

Type number

Rated capacity of motors 50/60Hz AC-3 category 220V / 230V 380V / 400V 415V / 440V

LT5 D255 LT5 D325

5.5

7.5

11 15

Rated current (A)

Thermal relay adjustment range

17 .. 25A

23 .. 32A

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue Package number / Box

230

43251

1 / 16

400

43252

1 / 16

230

43321

1 / 16

400

43322

1 / 16

Coil voltage (V)

Catalogue Package number / Box

Remark : Under request the thermal relay will be replaced 135

142

185 2 x PE16

16 PE13 2xÆ 5.5

101 165

Type number

Rated capacity of motors 50/60Hz AC-3 category

Rated current (A)

Thermal relay adjustment range

30 .. 40A

220V / 230V 380V / 400V 415V / 440V

LT5 D405 LT5 D655 LT5 D955

11.0 18.5 25.0

18.5 30.0 45.0

22 37 45

65 95

Remark : Under request the thermal relay will be replaced 150

161

312 2 x PE29

4x Æ 7.7

105 181 PE13

195

48 .. 65A 80 .. 93A

230

43401

1/6

400

43402

1/6

230

43651

1/6

400

43652

1/6

230

43951

1/6

400

43952

1/6

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors “Star/delta” starter

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The electromagnetic starters LT 3 Dxx series are devices designed for remote control, direct control and protection of induction motors coiled and operating according to a starter scheme “star/delta”. They are a combination of three contactors LT 1 Dxx series, time relay and a set of buttons “start” and “stop” fabric cabled. They provide the easy motor unwinding giving possibility for setting the time for unwinding in “star” as the time for switching between “star” and “delta” is fixed to 0.5 seconds. The starters are offered on the market in two types: - closed type – metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP 54) as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors - open type – for mounting in distribution boxes as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors The starters are offered on the market without mounted thermal protection which is purchased separately according to the motor capacity. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. If necessary, at client’s order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed. Functions: - switching on/off alternating current three phase motors operating according to a scheme “star - delta” - does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage - protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection - indication of the operating condition through a valve indicator - possibility for mounting of additional contacts (for the open type) - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Technical data: E5 * Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC; 50/60 Hz Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives. * Rated operating voltage: 690V * Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93A AC * insulation voltage: >690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Little power consumption and small dimensions * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to the motor power - three by three inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * Protection degree:IP54 * Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof paint * Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 60ْ C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”.

95 96 1

21 REMOTE

CONTROL

22 13 14

V1 W1

5 6 LT2-Exx

K3 Kx = LT3-Dxx

12 14 12 14 55

56 21

68 K1

22 K2

21 22

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors “Star/delta” starter

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Type designation (without a box)

LТ3-D25А LТ3-D32А LТ3-D40А LТ3-D65А LТ3-D95А

Type designation (without a box)

LТ3-D25А LТ3-D32А LТ3-D40А LТ3-D65А LТ3-D95А

Rated capacity kW

220V 230V

380V 400V

11 15 18.5 30 37

15 18.5 22 55 75

415V 15 18.5 22 55 75

Overall dimensions (mm) height

width

depth

135 135 150 150 150

170 170 285 285 310

160 160 190 190 190

Rated current

Coil voltage (V AC)

Catalogue number

25А 32А 40А 65А 95А

400 400 400 400 400

43253 43323 43403 43653 43953

440V 15 18.5 22 55 75

Note: It is necessary that thermal protection with suitable range is mounted to protect the controlled motor. The shown values of magnetic starters are for normal regimes for motor control, for hard operation regimes are chosen starters which correspond to the current rating of the motor

Type designation (with a box)

LT 3 -B-D25A LT 3 -B-D32A LT 3 -B-D40A LT 3 -B-D65A LT 3 -B-D95A

Type designation (with a box)

LT 3 - B - D25А LT 3 - B - D32А LT 3 - B - D40А LT 3 - B - D65А LT 3 - B - D95А

Rated capacity kW

220V 230V

380V 400V

11 15 18.5 30 37

15 18.5 22 55 75

415V 15 18.5 22 55 75

Overall dimensions (mm) height

width

depth

370 370 470 470 470

240 240 265 265 265

160 160 160 160 160

Rated current

Coil voltage (V AC)

Catalogue number

25А 32А 40А 65А 95А

400 400 400 400 400

43254 43255 43256 43257 43258

440V 15 18.5 22 55 75

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Reverse starters

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60947-4-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”. L -1 4A 97NO F1

95NC R 96

14 N0 K1 13 S1

14 N0 K2 13 S2

L 2/N

1 L1

3 L2

5 L3

1 L1

3 L2

2 T1

4 T2

6 T3

2 T1

4 T2

1 L1

3 L2

5 L3

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The electromagnetic starters LT4 Dxx series are devices used for direct start, reverse start and protection of induction motors with short connected rotor. They are a combination of two contactors LT1 Dxx series supplied with two buttons “start” and one “stop” fabric cabled. They provide the unwinding of the motor in one of the directions with possibility for pushing the button “stop” and giving command from the other “start” for changing the motor winding direction. The two contactors are mechanically blocked and do not allow simultaneous start in both winding directions. The starters are offered – closed type in metal boxes providing the corresponding IP code from dust and moisture (IP54) as at mounting there should be provided protection of the device from short circuit through breakers or disconnectors. The starters are offered with mounted thermal protection which can be substituted according to the motor power. The choice of a suitable protection prevents motor’s operation at unusual temperature conditions and guarantees maximum constant operation, increases the effectiveness and prolongs the term of exploitation. If necessary, at order the power supply operating voltage of the pneumatic starter can be changed. Functions: - switching on alternating current three phase motors in one winding direction, switching off and change of the winding direction at giving a signal - does not allow secondary unwarranted switching on of the starter at transitory lowering of the voltage - protects the motor from overload in the range of the corresponding thermal protection - remarkable with high reliability of current characteristics Technical data: * Rated voltage of the controlling voltage: 400V AC; 50/60 Hz Note: In case you need different controlling coils voltage of the starters you can turn to our regional representatives. * Rated operating voltage: 690V * Rated operating current range: from 7 to 93 A AC * insulation voltage: 690V * Surge voltage wear resistance:≥6000V * Joining terminal: screw terminal * Little power consumption and small dimensions * Connecting: - flexible or rigid conductors with or without cable terminal for joining to the consumer and section according to the motor power - three by three inlets/outlets supplied with orifices for the cables * Possibility for operation at higher frequency * IP code: IP 44 * Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface (wall) with bolts/screws - mounting position: vertical gradient – maximum± 5ْ * Plastic: wear resistance of UV rays and non-flammable (self-extinguishing material) * The metal body is covered with corrosion-proof paint * Ambient temperature: -10C ْ + 60ْ C * Altitude: up to 2000m

5 L3

K2 6 T3

Type designation (with a box)

F1 2 T1

4 T2

6 T3

U1 V1 W1

scheme “Reverse”

LT 4 - B - D25А LT 4 - B - D32А LT 4 - B - D40А LT 4 - B - D65А LT 4 - B - D95А LT 4 - B - D25А LT 4 - B - D32А LT 4 - B - D40А LT 4 - B - D65А LT 4 - B - D95А

Rated capacity kW

Overall dimensions (mm)

220V 230V

380V 400V

415V

440V height width

11.0 15.0 18.5 30.0 37.0 11.0 15.0 18.5 30.0 37.0

15.0 18.5 22.0 55.0 75.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 55.0 75.0

240 240 270 270 270 240 240 270 270 270

240 240 265 265 265 240 240 265 265 265

Rated current (А)

Coil voltage (V AC)

Catalogue number

400 400 400 400 400 230 230 230 230 230

43001 43002 43003 43004 43005 43006 43007 43008 43009 43010

depth

160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160

25 32 40 65 95 25 32 40 65 95

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors

www.elmarkgroup.eu

ELM 1000 frequency inverters Frequency inverters are designed to control three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. They provide for the implementation of some control laws, thus becoming an indispensable part of the control systems for conveyors and packaging machines. The ELM 1000 inverter provides optimized V/f control and output load can reach up to 150% within 60 seconds. It features easy definition of curves and easy parameters setting of inverter through the use of control panel buttons.

Documents corresponding to the product:

Standard EN60898-1 EN 60947-2 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”.

Functions: - rotation speed increase – automatic and manual - sliding compensation: from 0 to 20% - adjustment of the V/F control curve – linear or quadratic - energy saving through automatic optimization of the V/F curve - omission of resonance frequencies - JOG function - 'counter' function - automatic restart option in case of power supply failure - seven speed degrees control option - control choice from the control panel; external or COM terminal - frequency control from the control panel, external potentiometer by current or by voltage - incoming signals on clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation, multi-step control, restart, etc. - outgoing discrete control signal 24V - outgoing analogue control signal 0 – 10V - DC brake in static mode - dynamic breaking with external breaking resistor – used in inert electric motor load - output voltage adjustment option - activation of output safety functions option Technical features: * Rated working voltage: 230/400V АС; 50 Hz * Permissible working voltage deviation: ±10% * Unbalance of phases: < 3% * Frequency fluctuation: < 5% * Output frequency: 0 – 400 Hz * Output voltage: from 0 to Ubx max * Overload capacity: - constant: up to 110% - moment: up to 150% * Precision of output frequency adjustment: 0.1% * Type of connection: - the connection of the inverter to the power supply should always be done through a circuit breaker of the MCB or MCCB type - connection of consumer to power terminals: through conductors suitable for the power - connection of control circuits: flexible conductor up to 1.5 mm2 Note: It is not recommendable to mount contactors or other commutation devices between the frequency inverter and the motor, except as described in the product passport. *Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface by means of bolts - mounting position – vertical gradient maximum ± 5° Note: When more than one inverter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to install them side by side and when this is not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided. * Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10° to 60° C * Altitude : up to 2000 m * Function enhancement option: through the inclusion of additional modules

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors

ELM 1000 frequency inverters

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Type of sign ELМ1000- G -0150 T3 С lid type code: C=metal clips; B=plastic lid power supply code: T3=three-phase; S2= single phase motor power inverter type: G=constant momentum inverter model Dimensions (mm): Type of inverter

ELМ1000-G0007S2B ELМ1000-G0015S2B ELM1000-G0022S2B ELМ1000-G0007T3B ELМ1000-G0015T3B ELМ1000-G0022T3B ELМ1000-G0037T3B ELМ1000-G0040T3B ELМ1000-G0055T3B ELМ1000-G0075T3B ELМ1000-G0110T3C ELМ1000-G0150T3C

150 170 170 170 170 170 250 250 300 300 340 380

105 125 125 125 125 125 162 162 200 200 225 230

139 160 160 160 160 160 233 233 282 282 322 362

94 114 114 114 114 114 145 145 182 182 160 186

120 140 140 140 140 140 150 150 160 160 220 225

Type

Input voltage

Maximum output power (kW)

Maximum current output (А)

Catalogue number

230V 230V 230V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V

0.75 1.5 2.2 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15

4.5 7 9 2 4 6.5 8 9 12 17 23 32

423107M 423115M 423122M 423307M 423315M 423322M 423337M 423340M 423355M 423375M 423391M 423392M

R S T

R S

U V

W E

OP 1

TA TB TC

OP 2 OP 3 OP 4 OP 5 OP 6

FM V3

IM V3

OP 7 OP 8 COM V1 V2

12V OUT

I2 V3

A+ B-

J 485 Comunication

Ø4 Ø5 Ø5 Ø5 Ø5 Ø5 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors

www.elmarkgroup.eu

ELM2000 frequency inverters with no-sensor control Frequency inverters are designed to control three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. They provide for the implementation of some control laws, thus becoming an indispensable part of the control systems for conveyors and packaging machines, pumps, air conditioning systems, etc. The ELM 2000 inverter provides the so-called no-sensor control, V/f control and impulse control while the output load can reach up to 150% within 60 seconds. It features easy definition of curves and easy parameters setting of inverter through the use of control panel buttons. The inverter can auto calibrate according to the motor power, i.e. if the inverter is connected to a motor with power different from that set by the inverter manufacturer, it automatically adjusts its programmable parameters to suit the motor parameters.

Documents corresponding to the product:

Functions: - rotation speed increase – automatic and manual - sliding compensation: from 0 to 20% - no-sensor control of the motor - adjustment of the V/F control curve – linear or quadratic - energy saving through automatic optimization of the V/F curve - PID control law implementation option - omission of resonance frequencies - JOG function - 'counter' function - automatic restart option in case of power supply failure - fifteen speed degrees control option - control choice from the control panel; external or COM terminal - frequency control from the control panel, external potentiometer by current or by voltage - auto-calibration in accordance with the switched motor - incoming signals on clockwise or counter-clockwise rotation, multi-step control, restart, etc. - outgoing discrete control signal 24V - outgoing analogue control signal 0 – 10V - DC brake in static mode - dynamic breaking with external breaking resistor – used in inert electric motor load - output voltage adjustment option - activation of output safety functions option - electronic motor protection Technical features: * Rated working voltage: 230/400V АС; 50 Hz * Permissible working voltage deviation: ±10% * Unbalance of phases: < 3% * Frequency fluctuation: < 5% * Output frequency: 0 – 400 Hz * Output voltage: from 0 to Ubx max * Overload capacity: - constant: up to 110% - momentary: up to 150% * Precision of output frequency adjustment: 0.1% * Type of connection: - the connection of the inverter to the power supply should always be done through a circuit breaker of the MCB or MCCB type - connection of consumer to power terminals: through conductors suitable for the power - connection of control circuits: flexible conductor up to 1.5 mm2 Note: It is not recommendable to mount contactors or other commutation devices between the frequency inverter and the motor, except as described in the product passport. * Mounting: - mounting to a flat surface by means of bolts - mounting position – vertical gradient maximum ± 5° Note: When more than one inverter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to mount them side by side and when this is not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided. * Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-extinguishing material) * Ambient temperature: -10° to 60° C * Altitude : up to 2000 m * Function enhancement option: through the inclusion of additional modules

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors

ELM2000 frequency inverters with no-sensor control

www.elmarkgroup.eu

ELМ2000-G0007S2B ELМ2000-G0015S2B ELM2000-G0022S2B ELМ2000-G0007T3B ELМ2000-G0015T3B ELМ2000-G0022T3B ELМ2000-G0037T3B ELМ2000-G0040T3B ELМ2000-G0055T3B ELМ2000-G0075T3B ELМ2000-G0110T3C ELМ2000-G0150T3C

150 170 170 170 170 170 250 250 300 300 340 380

105 125 125 125 125 125 162 162 200 200 225 230

139 160 160 160 160 160 233 233 282 282 322 362

94 114 114 114 114 114 145 145 182 182 160 186

120 140 140 140 140 140 150 150 160 160 220 225

Type

Input voltage

Maximum output power (kW)

Maximum current output (А)

Catalogue number

230V 230V 230V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V

0.75 1.5 2.2 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15

4.5 7 9 2 4 6.5 8 9 12 17 23 32

423107B 423115B 423122B 423307B 423315B 423322B 423337B 423340B 423355B 423375B 423391B 423392B

R S T

R S

U V

W E

OP 1

TA TB TC

OP 2 OP 3 ... ... OP 13

FM V3

IM V3

OP 14 OP 15 COM V1 V2

12V OUT

I2 V3

A+ B-

J 485 Comunication

Ø4 Ø5 Ø5 Ø5 Ø5 Ø5 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverters

www.elmarkgroup.eu Stopping equipment

Brake resistor and brake element – used when stopping time is little or load inertia moment is huge. Inverters up to 15W are offered with built in brake element but for consumers with high requirements to stopping, there are brake resisters as an outer module for additional mounting to the brake module. Functions: - increasing of the brake moment - providing a quick stop of the motor Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz * Admissible diversion of the rated voltage: ±10% * Disbalance of the phases: <3% * Connecting: - connecting to the inverter through suitable connecting conductors according to the given scheme * Mounting: - to a metal surface/frame near the inverter - necessity for enough space for the normal cooling of the module - take precautious measures to prevent the access to the electrical connections Connecting scheme of a brake resister Connecting scheme of the auxiliary elements

E8 Breaking module

Inverter

Breaking resister

Breaker (MCCB)

Contactor

Inverter type

Inlet voltage

Breaking module

Break resistor admissible value for inverter type

Catalogue number

230V 230V 230V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V 400V

embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded embedded

80W/200Ω 160W/100Ω 300W/70Ω 80W/750Ω 160W/400Ω 300W/250Ω 400W/150Ω 400W/150Ω 600W/100Ω 800W/75Ω 1000W/50Ω 1500W40Ω

422202 422204 422205 422206 422207 422208 422209 422210 422211 422212 422213 422214

Inlet reactor

Inlet EMC filter DC reactor

Outside breaking resister Inverter

Outside breaking module Outlet EMC filter

EL xxx-G0007S2 EL xxx-G0015S2 EL xxx-G0022S2 EL xxx-G0007T4 EL xxx-G0015T4 EL xxx-G0022T4 EL xxx-G0037T4 EL xxx-G0040T4 EL xxx-G0055T4 EL xxx-G0075T4 EL xxx-G0110T4 EL xxx-G0150T4

Outlet reactor

Remote control (Extension of the control panel) It doubles the control panel and serves for control of the inverter from a distance. It represents the inverter panel fabric cabled with cables with different length – 1.0; 1.5; 2.0; 5 and 10m. It is ordered as a separate position in addition to the standard equipment of the inverter. Inverter type

EL xxx-G0007S2 EL xxx-G0015S2 EL xxx-G0007T4 EL xxx-G0015T4 EL xxx-G0022T4 EL xxx-G0037T4 EL xxx-G0055T4 EL xxx-G0075T4 EL xxx-G0110T4 EL xxx-G0150T4

Cable length

2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m 2m

Type designation

UPM 2 UPM 2 UPM 2 UPM 2 UPM 2 UPM 2 UPM 2 UPM 2 UPG 2 UPG 2

Catalogue number

422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPM2 422UPG2 422UPG2

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors Auxiliary equipment for frequency inverter

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Filters for protection of the power supply grid from high harmonics (inlet) The use of frequency inverters for control of motors with short connected rotor is a precondition for interference from non-sine character in the power supply grid. It concerns to a great extent the use of powerful inverters. The protection of the power supply grid from the interference is accomplished through the mounting before the inverter of specially designed throttle elements that smoothen these non-sine waves generated at the operation of the inverter’s rectifier block. Functions: - protection of the power supply grid from high harmonics Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 275/480V AC; 50Hz * Admissible diversion of the operating voltage: ±10% * insulation voltage - phase – earth (2s): 2250V DC - phase – phase (2s): 1500V DC * Connecting: - connecting to the inverter through suitable connecting conductors according to the given scheme * Mounting: - to a metal surface/frame near the inverter - necessity for enough space for the normal cooling of the module - take precautious measures to prevent the access to the electrical connections - mounted between the inverter and the power supply grid Inverter type

EL xxx-G0007S2 EL xxx-G0015S2 EL xxx-G0022S2 EL xxx-G0007T4 EL xxx-G0015T4 EL xxx-G0022T4 EL xxx-G0037T4 EL xxx-G0040T4 EL xxx-G0055T4 EL xxx-G0075T4 EL xxx-G0110T4 EL xxx-G0150T4

Inlet filter type

DL - 6TH1 DL - 10TH3 DL 15TH1 DL - 5EBK5/40 DL - 5EBK5/40 DL - 10EBK5/40 DL - 16EBK5/40 DL - 16EBK5/40 DL - 16EBK5/40 DL - 25EBK5/40 DL - 35EBK5/40 DL - 50EBK5/50

Catalogue number

422001 422002 422003 422004 422005 422006 422007 422008 422009 422010 422011 422012

Filters for protection from electromagnetic interference (EMC) (outlet) The use of frequency inverters for control of motors with short connected rotor can lead to interference in the magnetic circuits of appliances mounted near the inverter. This is a specially designed filter element that can be mounted at the outlet of the inverter to protect the other equipment from the electromagnetic interference from the motor power supply cable. This filter is recommended when using frequency inverters in systems with special functions, radio dependent systems, medical equipment, etc. Functions: - protection of the power supply grid from electromagnetic interference Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 275/480V AC; 50Hz * Admissible diversion of the operating voltage: ±10% * Insulation voltage - phase – earth (2s): 1500V DC - phase – phase (2s): 1500V DC * Connecting: - connecting to the inverter through suitable connecting conductors according to the given scheme * Mounting: - to a metal surface/frame near the inverter - necessity for enough space for the normal cooling of the module - take precautious measures to prevent the access to the electrical connections - mounted between the inverter and the power supply grid Inverter type

Outlet filter type

EL xxx-G0007S2 EL xxx-G0015S2 EL xxx-G0022S2 EL xxx-G0007T4 EL xxx-G0015T4 EL xxx-G0022T4 EL xxx-G0037T4 EL xxx-G0040T4 EL xxx-G0055T4 EL xxx-G0075T4 EL xxx-G0110T4 EL xxx-G0150T4

DL - 5EBL5/40 DL - 10EBL5/40 DL - 16EBL5/40 DL - 5EBL5/40 DL - 5EBL5/40 DL - 10EBL5/40 DL - 16EBL5/40 DL - 16EBL5/40 DL - 16EBL5/40 DL - 25EBL5/40 DL - 35EBL5/40 DL - 50EBL5/40

Catalogue number

422013 422014 422015 422016 422017 422018 422019 422020 422021 422022 422023 422024

Devices for control and protection of electrical motors

ELM 2500 soft starters

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Soft starters are designed to control the start of three-phase induction motors with short-circuited rotor. A number of motor control issues are avoided through them, and namely: prolonged start moments, auto-ignition of motor, there is no need of stardelta switching, auto-transformer switching, resistant switching, etc. The ELM 2500 soft starter pertains to the AC53b type of starters as per the standard requirements and it provides rotation of motor and once the operation mode is set, a shunt contactor of the LT 1 D/F series is switched to control motor operation as the soft starter is not designed to control motors in a set mode. Under a stop command in accordance with the selected control scheme, the soft starter can or can not be included in shutting the motor down. Functions: 1. System functions - over-voltage protection – motor will switch off when power supply exceeds the preset limits - overload protection – protects the motor from overloading - phase loss protection - temperature overload protection 2. Control functions - output faults - motor faults diagnostics - keyboard or outward control - delayed start option - faults memory Technical features: * Rated working voltage: 230/400V АС; 50 Hz * Permissible working voltage deviation: ±10% * Unbalance of phases: < 3% * Frequency fluctuation: < 5% * Obligatory bypass contactor installation * Mounting : - mounting to a flat surface through bolts - mounting position – vertical gradient maximum ± 5° Note: When more than one soft starter is mounted in a board, it is recommendable to mount them side by side and when this is not possible, the appropriate cooling conditions should be provided. * Plastic: UV-rays resistant and fire resistant (self-extinguishing material) * Altitude : up to 2000 m

Documents corresponding to the product:

Standard EN60947-4-2 EN 60947-1 The products are in accordance with the directives of EC “Low voltage directives (LVD) no. 73/23 EEC” and “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC”.

Dimensions (mm) Type of soft starter

EL M25015 EL M25022 EL M25037 EL M25045 EL M25055 EL M25075

F B

250 250 250 250 250 510

153 153 153 153 153 260

162 162 162 162 162 194

219 219 219 219 219 389

140 140 140 140 140 232

Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø6 Ø8

R ST A

Тип на софтстартера

QF S3

R LT1-D/Fxx

15 PE

14 RST

Lt2

13 BX

12 STOP

11 10 RUN CM

ЕLM2500 U

LT 2 Exx

T2 T3

30A

LT 1 D/Fxx

8 9 30B 30C

EL M25015 EL M25022 EL M25037 EL M25045 EL M25055 EL M25075

Мощност Номинален ток Тип на байпасен на двигателя (А) контактор ( kW )

15 22 37 45 55 75

30 45 76 90 110 150

LT 1-D 50 LT 1-D 50 LT 1-D 80 LT 1-D 95 LT 1-F 115 LT 1-F 150

Сечение на Каталожен номер захранващите проводници

10 10 16 25 25 35

42225015 42225022 42225037 42225045 42225055 42225075

Timers, relays and displaying devices Programmable timers

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 15A

Cat.N 50036

The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It can memorize up to eight ON/OFF programs (ON/OFF cycles). Each program setting is done through the push buttons. Programming starts with selection of the days of the week (you can choose among a whole week cycle, work days cycle, weekend cycle, or a specific day of the week); then the cycle start time and end time are set. If you have selected work days cycle, then the program will start and stop at the set times each work day of the week. This is one ON/OFF program. Where necessary, other programs can be memorized up to the limit of eight possible programs. If you continue setting new programs the first memorized program will be deleted. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 1 minute. Technical data: * Display: LCD * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Operations: 8 switching ON/OFF * Time deviation: <2s (at 25°C) * Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days * Power consumption: <5VA * Switched on indicator * Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles 85 * Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Operating temperature: -10 - +40°C * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH * Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC * Commutating capacity: F1 - active load: up to 6A 36 64 - inductive load: up to 2.5 * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 15B

Cat.N 50101

The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting.It can memorize up to six ON/OFF programs (ON/OFF cycles). Each program setting is done through the push buttons. Programming starts with selection of the days of the week (you can choose among a whole week cycle, work days cycle, weekend cycle, or a specific day of the week); then the cycle start time and end time are set. If you have selected work days cycle, then the program will start and stop at the set times each work day of the week. This is one ON/OFF program. Where necessary, other programs can be memorized up to the limit of eight possible programs. If you continue setting new programs the first memorized program will be deleted. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 1 minute. There is possibility for automatic correction of the time according to the seasonal sun variations. Technical data: * Display: LCD * Automatic adjustment of the current time (time correction winter/summer) * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Operations: 6 switching ON/OFF * Time deviation: <2s (at 25°C) * Battery for programme storing: up to 15 days * Power consumption: <5VA * Switched on indicator * Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Operating temperature: -10 - +40°C * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH 85 * Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC * Commutating capacity: - active load: up to 6A - inductive load: up to 2.5 * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail 36 64

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Cat.N 50100

Cat.N 35005

Cat.N 50102

Timers, relays and displaying devices Programmable timers Programmable digital one-channel timer TE 20 The timer is manufactured under the CMOS technology with a quartz minicontroller which makes it reliable for operation. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is possible to adjust forty-eight ON/OFF cycles. Each program setting is done through selection of the cycle start and end time with the push buttons. When a program is on, the time cycle is indicated as a dimmed out section on the dial. For example, if you start a 2-hour program the 2-hour portion between On and Off times on the dial becomes dark. The minimal interval for cycle programming is 15 minutes. The battery allows programme storing at lack of power supply. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Time deviation: <2s (at 25°C) * Battery for programme storing and operation: up to 150 hours * Power consumption: <5VA * Switched on indicator * Electrical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Operating temperature: -10 - +40°C * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH * Number of contacts: 1NO + 1NC * Li-Ion battery: 150h * Commutating capacity: - active load: up to 16A * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail

Tariff switching clock (timer) TE 18 The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used for switching on tariff lighting in housing buildings and switching off after the adjusted time. Easy to adjust time intervals, mounting and conducting. Reliable to use. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Adjustment range: 0.5 to 20 min * Power consumption: <5VA * Operating temperature: -10-+55°C * Humidity: 45 – 85%RH * Number of contacts: 1NO * Commutating capacity: - active load: up to 16A - inductive load: up to 10 A * Weight: 75g Mounting: * DIN-rail

Time relay “star/delta” TE 19 The time relay is manufactured under the most modern methods of qualitative and reliable materials. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. It is used to provide reliable and safe time hold at “star/delta” starters and it is used for setting fixed time intervals. Programming is done through selection of the time unit (seconds or minutes) and rate (x 0.1 or x1) by the slide switches, and then selection of a value from the timer knob (from 0 to 10). Whenever timer circuit receives a signal, it executes the set cycle and then stops until a new signal is available.. It gives possibility for time adjustment for motor unwinding in star up to 600s and time change to delta according to the consumer’s need. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Adjustment range for operation in star: 1 to 600 seconds * Repetition accuracy: ±5% from the whole scale * Adjustment accuracy: ±5% from the whole scale * Zeroing time: <0.5s * Power consumption: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 100 000 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles * Operating temperature: -10-+55°C * Humidity: 45 – 85%RH * Commutating capacity: up to 5A * Indication: - at operation in “star”: red indication - at operation in “delta”: green indication * Weight: 150g Mounting: * DIN-rail

Timers, relays and displaying devices Programmable timers

Тype

Catalogue number

ТЕ8А - 1а ТЕ8А - 2а

50113 50114

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Timer TE8A – 1a, TE8A – 2a The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. It has a built in battery which allows operation of the timers without charging up to 150 hours. The timer is adjusted for DIN-rail mounting. Timer programming is done through selection of the operational day(s) of the week, followed by selection of the start time and end time. You may choose out of ten modes (one for each day of the week, one for the work days, one for the weekends and one for the whole week). When setting the time, you should start first with the hours and then continue with the minutes. ТЕ8A - 1a - Up to eight programs can be memorized. The on/off time resolution is 1 minute. ТЕ8A - 2a - It has two operating channels, each of which can adjust four programmes for a day or a week with minimal interval of 1 minute for switching on and off. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Power consumption: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Operating temperature: -10ºC - +55ºC * Temperature of storage: up to 70C * Humidity: 45 – 85%RH * Commutating capacity: up to 16A * Two outlet relays * Li-Ion battery: 150h * Weight: 150g F1 Mounting: * DIN-rail Impulse relay Impulse relays allow circuit remote control. They can be operated manually, remotely, from several control points, or by impulses. Impulse relays are most frequently used for the control of lighting circuits in various public places with multiple control points.

Cat.No: 50104

Timer TE6B The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards. The direction of operation is adjusted – direct or reverse. There is possibility to adjust the time range from 0.01 second to 99 hours 59 minutes, possibility for correction of the set values during operation. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Possibility for choice of operating range: - from 0.01 second to 99.99 seconds - from 1 second to 99.59 minutes - from 1 minute to 99.59 hours * Error: <0.01% ±0.05s * Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms * Power consumption: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Operating temperature: -10-+55°C * Temperature of storage: up to 70°C * Humidity: 45 – 85%RH * Commutating capacity at active load: 3A * Weight: 300g Mounting: * on the front panel of the board 045

Cat.No: 50300

Technical data: * Control voltage: 230V * Rated current of the power circuit: 16А * Electrical endurance: 200000 cycles * Maximum switching frequency: 5 operations/minute * Impulse duration: 50ms Connection: * tunnel terminals

Timers, relays and displaying devices Programmable timers

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Cat.N 50105

Timer TE48S-S The timer is manufactured under the most modern technology CMOS with a quartz minicontroller which makes it precise, qualitative and reliable. The timer is modulated to be mounted on the front panel of boards. The direction of operation is adjusted – direct or reverse. It represents two separate operating channels, each of which can operate independently with time range adjustment from 1 second to 99 minutes. Possibility for correction of the set values during operation. First, select the time unit (seconds or minutes) and then set the time. Depending on the timer coupling, it can be used as a cyclic timer relay, i.e. it initially counts the first time set, then counts the second time set, then starts counting over the first time again, etc. until a stop signal is received. In another mode, the timer can count the set time and stop until a new signal is received to count the next cycle. Indication on LCD display with high resolution and showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Admissible variation of the input voltage: 85-110%U * Possibility for choice of operating range: - from 1 to 99 seconds - from 1 minute to 99 minutes * Error: <0.01% ±0.05s * Minimal duration of the input pulse: 20ms * Power consumption: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 105 cycles * Operating temperature: -10-+55°C * Temperature of storage: up to 70°C * Humidity: 45 – 85%RH * Commutating capacity at load: 3A * Weight: 300g Mounting: * on the front panel of the board

indication

Adjusting block

Т1 Time setting

Cat.№ 50102M

Т2 Time setting

Timer ТЕ 19M Timer is developed using modern technologies from quality and reliable materials and is adapted for mounting on DIN rail. It is used for providing time intervals in eight time programs, which are assigned by combinations of the keys. There is an option for it to operate in time ranges (assigned by the keys K4, K5,K6): seconds, minutes or hours depending on the necessity of the user. Power contact up to 3A. Technical characteristics: * Input voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Range of setting: from 0.6 sec to 100 hours * Accuracy of setting: ± 5% from the whole scale * Time for nullifying: <0.5 seconds * Consumed capacity: < 5VA * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 100 000 cycles * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 1 000 000 cycles * Operation temperature: -10 - +55°С * Humidity: 45 - 85%RH * Computing option: up to 5А * Indication: - on power supply: red indication - on operational output relay: green indication * Weight: 150 gr. * Time functions: according to the programming guide Mounting method: * DIN rail

Timers, relays and displaying devices Digital counters

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Universal digital counter CE2J The device is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of counting and high counting reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display with black lighting digits, providing excellent visibility at different lighting. The counter is to be mounted on the front panel of the boards. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet operation at reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for changing the position of the decimal point. Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1 Cat.N

50111

Technical data: * Display: LCD Power supply indicator * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz Current value * Counting range: 0 - 99999 * Counting speed: 30/3k cps Set value 1 and 2 * Zeroing: outside impulse * Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years Return button * Power consumption: <5VA System * Operating temperature: -10-+40°C return button * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH * Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active load: up to 3A * Weight: 250g Mounting: * on the front panel * opening with dimensions: 45x45

Protection indicator

Outlet channel indicator

Set value

Setting buttons (1~6)

Operational button

Display button

065

Combined digital counter/timer CE10J The device is for front mounting in the board. It can be used as a counter or timer choosing a definite combination from keys. It is manufactured under the modern technology CMOS which allows high speed of counting, precision at operation as a timer and high reliability. It has a built in battery which allows data storing for more than 10 years. It is supplied with a digital display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation or deduction. There is possibility for relay outlet operation at reaching beforehand set value, and also a possibility for changing the position of the decimal point. Cat.N

50120

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1 Technical data: * Display: LCD * Power supply voltage: 230V; 50Hz * Counting range: 0 – 999 * Timer range: 0.01 – 99h99min * Counting speed: 30/500 cps * Zeroing: outside impulse * Battery for programme storing: up to 10 years * Power consumption: <3VA * Mechanical wear resistance: 107 cycles * Operating temperature: -5-+40°C * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH * Commutating capacity: relay outlet with active load: up to 3A * Weight: 120g Mounting: * on the front panel * opening with dimensions: 45x45

operating value

set value

functional button

065

Timers, relays and displaying devices Digital counters

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Total digital counter CE15J The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as an impulse counter with no outside power supply. For that purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device for 5 years. It has eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for impulse sequence counting with accumulation.

Cat.N

50112 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1

Technical data: * Display: LCD * Power supply voltage: built in battery * Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC * Counting accuracy: <0.002% * Data storing battery: up to 5 years * Operating temperature: -5-+40°C * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail Total digital counter CE15L The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used as a time impulse counter with no outside power supply. For that purpose there is a Li battery built in the device which provides data storing and operation of the device for 5 years. It has eight digital lighting display providing excellent visibility at different lighting. It is used for time impulse sequence counting with accumulation. It displays the operated time.

Cat.N

50115 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1

Cat.N

50103 Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1

Technical data: * Display: LCD * Power supply voltage: built in battery * Inlet signal: 100-230V AC/DC * Counting accuracy: <0.002% * Battery for data storing: up to 5 years * Operating temperature: -5-+40°C * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail

Phase sequence indicator EK - RSTB The device is to be mounted on DIN-rail. It is used for control and indication of the presence, sequence and quality of the phases. The device indicates the following fault: - lack of one or several phases; - change in the sequence of the phases; - lowering of the power supplying voltage: under 10%; - increasing of the power supplying voltage: over 10%; - phase asymmetry of the power supplying voltage: ±10% In the presence of one of the conditions above a relay starts operating in the device which breaks the controlling circuit. The time between fault indication and outlet relay switching on can be adjusted in order to prevent unwilling stops at very short breaks. When the voltage is back to normal limits, the device receives energy (indication lights) according to the hysteresic values. At phase sequence fault the device operates immediately. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 400V; 50Hz * Possibility for operation range adjustment: 0.1 – 10 seconds * Possibility for working range adjustment: from 300 to 480 V * Electrical wear resistance: 1 000 000 cycles * Mechanical wear resistance: 10 000 000 cycles * Indication: - green LED – indication for a change in the condition - red LED - failure * Operating temperature: -5-+40°C * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH * Weight: 120g Mounting: * DIN-rail

Timers, relays and displaying devices Industrial Relays

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Industrial Relays and Bases Devices intended for construction of automation and signalling boards. They are mainly used for command transfer towards the executive mechanisms. Currents of comparatively heavy values enabling the direct control of industrial executive mechanisms are commuted in comparatively small sizes. The contact surfaces are made from silver-coated electrolytic copper. The entire contact system is closed within a lid of colourless fire-proof plastic with a test-button installed to it. The base provides a safe electric connection of the conductors of the electric installation and the relays and is used to install the relay to the DIN busbar.

Documents corresponding to the product:EN 60947-5-1; EN 61810

Technical Characteristics: * Supply voltage: from 12 to 230V АС, 50 Нz and from 12 to 110V DC * Acceptable deviation of the supply voltage: 85 -110% Un * Rated current of the sockets: 10А АС * Electrical endurance: 1 000 000 cycles * Isolation resistance: 500 mΩ /min (500V) * Impulse tension resistance: 2000V, 50Нz * Dielectric strength: 1000V АС/1 min * Turn-out time: 25ms * Working temperature: -5 - + 65°С * Humidity: 35 - 85% RH Method of installation: * on a DIN rail by means of a socket

ELM - 90.xx

ELM - 94.x

Catalogue number

Relay type

Voltage of the coil (V)

Socket type

ELM - 14FC ELM - 14FC ELM - 14FC

12 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC

ELM-08A ELM-08A ELM-08A

Relay type

Voltage of the coil (V)

Socket type

Resistance of the coil (Ω)

Number of contacts

Catalogue number

ELM - 60.2 ELM - 60.2 ELM - 60.2 ELM - 60.2 ELM - 60.13 ELM - 60.13 ELM - 60.13 ELM - 60.13 ELM - 60.13

12 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC 230 VAC 12 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC 110 VAC 230 VAC

ELM - 90.22 ELM - 90.22 ELM - 90.22 ELM - 90.22 ELM - 90.23 ELM - 90.23 ELM - 90.23 ELM - 90.23 ELM - 90.23

20 80 320 7400 20 80 320 1700 7400

2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC 3NO+3NC 3NO+3NC 3NO+3NC 3NO+3NC 3NO+3NC

57601 57602 57603 57605 57611 57612 57613 57614 57615

Relay type

Voltage of the coil (V)

Socket type

Resistance of the coil (Ω)

Number of contacts

Catalogue number

ELM - 55.02 ELM - 55.02 ELM - 55.02 ELM - 55.02 ELM - 55.04 ELM - 55.04 ELM - 55.04 ELM - 55.04 ELM - 55.04

12 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC 230 VAC 12 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC 110 VAC 230 VAC

ELM - 94.3 ELM - 94.3 ELM - 94.3 ELM - 94.3 ELM - 94.4 ELM - 94.4 ELM - 94.4 ELM - 94.4 ELM - 94.4

42 168 675 14000 42 168 675 3500 14000

3NO+3NC 3NO+3NC 3NO+3NC 3NO+3NC 4NO+4NC 4NO+4NC 4NO+4NC 4NO+4NC 4NO+4NC

57521 57522 57523 57525 57541 57542 57543 57544 57545

Socket type

Dimensions (mm)

Number of terminals (pcs.)

Catalogue number

ELM - 08A ELM - 94.3 ELM - 94.4 ELM - 90.22 ELM - 90.23

72 x 15 67 x 30 67 x 30 68 x 38 68 x 38

5 11 14 8 11

Resistance of the coil (Ω)

270 1080 4340

Number of contacts

NO+NC NO+NC NO+NC

57141 57142 57143

57901 57902 57903 57904 57905

Timers, relays and displaying devices Industrial Relays

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Documents corresponding to the product:EN 60947-5-1; EN 61810

Industrial Solid State Relays (SSR) Industrial SSR are intended for mounting in power and control cabinets as an output switch devices with reliable ON/OFF performance. The SSR are based on the CMOS technology. The non-contact electronic switch is optically separated from the input signal by a photoelectric coupler. This allows use of switch currents of up to 50A despite of the devices small overall size. Another important feature of the relay is that output load can be regulated depending on the input signal value. The relay is mainly used to transmit control signals to actuating mechanisms since it can work at comparatively high currents making it possible to directly control actuators. RRS have transparent plastic covers to additionally improve their safety level. The SSR use is connected with considerable heat emissions, so measures must be taken to dispense the excessive thermal energy in the atmosphere. This is achieved through application of specially deigned radiators. The correct definition of radiator parameters is of critical importance. It is made by calculating the heat generation capacity with the formula: Heat generation = active load current x 3.0 W/A. The heat removal surface is estimated with the help of the following graphic: Technical Specifications: Load/output voltage: 30/400V 50 Hz orheSRndrom0 o230/400VDC or the solid state voltage regulators Rated output current: from 10А to 60А Insulating voltage: 1000 MΩ /min (500V) Impulse voltage stability: 2000V, 50Hz Dielectric Strength: < 2500VAC / 1 min Leakage current: <2mA Turn-on time: <10ms Operating temperature: -5°С + 65°С Relative Humidity: 35 - 85%RH

Type

Relay Type

Control Voltage (V)

Output Voltage (V)

Number of phases

Output Current (А)

Catalogue number

ZG3NC - 2 - 10B ZG3NC - 2 - 20B ZG3NC - 2 - 25B ZG3NC - 2 - 40B ZG3NC - 2 - 60B ZG3NC - 3 -10B ZG3NC - 3 - 20B ZG3NC - 3 - 25B ZG3NC - 3 - 40B ZG3NC - 3 - 60B

SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR SSR

3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC

230VАC 230VАC 230VАC 230VАC 230VАC 400VАC 400VАC 400VАC 400VАC 400VАC

1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2

10 20 25 40 60 10 20 25 40 60

57710 57720 57725 57740 57760 57713 57723 57735 57743 57763

Type

Relay Type

Control Voltage (V)

Output Voltage (V)

Number of phases

Output Current (А)

Catalogue number

ZG1NC - 2 - 10D ZG1NC - 2 - 20D ZG1NC - 2 - 25D ZG1NC - 2 - 40D ZG1NC - 3 -10D ZG1NC - 3 - 20D ZG1NC - 3 - 25D ZG1NC - 3 - 40D

SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator SS voltage regulator

1-10VDC 1-10VDC 1-10VDC 1-10VDC 1-10VDC 1-10VDC 1-10VDC 1-10VDC

0-230VАC 0-230VАC 0-230VАC 0-230VАC 0-400VАC 0-400VАC 0-400VАC 0-400VАC

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2

10 20 25 40 10 20 25 40

57810 57820 57825 57840 57813 57823 57835 57843

Type

Relay Type

Control Voltage (V)

Output Voltage (V)

Number of phases

Output Current (А)

Catalogue number

ZG33 - 3 - 10В ZG33 - 3 - 20В ZG33 - 3 - 25В ZG 33 - 3 - 40В

SSR SSR SSR SSR

3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC 3-32VDC

400VАC 400VАC 400VАC 400VАC

3 3 3 3

10 20 25 40

57831 57832 57833 57834

Note: The relay output must be supplied with a varistor to ensure its over-voltage protection, whenever RRS is used to control inductive loads. Type of Radiator

Overall Dimensions (L/W/H)

Approximate Load (А)

Catalogue number

QW-A 50 QW-B 72 QW-B 100 QW-C 115 QW-E 50

60x50x50 72x100x50 100x100x50 115x100x50 150x88x35

15 20 25 40 75

57906 57907 57908 57909 57910

Timers, relays and displaying devices Devices for temperature measurement

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Digital Temperature Controller Type CD - 701 The device is intended for industrial control and monitoring of temperature. It allows monitoring and adjustment of temperatures of up to 1999°С depending on the used sensor – thermocouple or thermoresistor. The device allows programming of the used type of sensor (К (CA) ; J ( IC) PT 100, etc.) and the controller working range. It also allows selection of the control algorithm, error adjustment, indication hysteresis curve adjustment and alarm settings. The controller is intended for mounting on control panels. It is user friendly and can be set through the push buttons on the device front panel. The program can be password protected. When operational, the display shows the set temperature and the current temperature.

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1 Type

Catalogue number

CD - 701

50124

Technical Specifications: * Rated voltage: 230V, 50 Hz * Permissible voltage deviation: 85 - 110% Un * Input signal: from thermocouple, thermoresistor or unified signal (4-20mA; 0-10VDC) * Output: Relay * Emergency Output: Relay * Electrical life: 1 000 000 cycles. * Indication: - Green LED – indicates the measured (current) temperature - Red LED – indicates the set temperature * Insulation resistance: 20 MΩ /min (500V) * Impulse voltage stability: 2000V, 50Hz * Operating temperature: -5°С + 65°С * Relative Humidity: 35 - 85%RH Mounting: * on the front panel

Thermocouple and thermo resistance The thermo-measuring elements are designed for measuring the temperature in the point of contact between the surface (warmed or cooled) and the thermo-element. They are a comparatively cheap and the most wide-spread method for temperature measurement. The thermocouples are produced by accumulating two conductors from a special measuring alloy in one common head. Each of these elements has a specific electromotive voltage at a specific temperature. The temperature measuring is based on the difference in the electromotive powers between the hot and the cool end of the thermocouple, while this difference in the form of voltage of several milivolts is supplied at the input of the thermoregulator, which displays the measured temperature. Each thermocouple is produced and calibrated for measuring of specific temperature ranges depending on the alloys of which it is made. When thermocouples measuring great distances from the thermoregulators are used (more than 15 points), it is obligatory to use compensatory cable corresponding to the type of the thermocouple. The thermo-resistant elements action is based on the capacity of specific alloys, very often Pt100 to change their resistance when the temperature is changed. For each temperature value is specified a value of resistance. This value is supplied at the input of the thermoregulator, which displays the measured temperature. Each thermoregulator operates with a specific type of thermo-element.

Type of thermo-element

Symbol

Temperature range

Type of catching

Sizes of the head

Size of the free end

Catalogue number

WRNT - 01

-15 ÷ 95°C

nut

30 x 35

50K95G

WRNT - 01

0 ÷ 400°C

nut

30 x 35

50K40G

WRNT - 31

0 ÷ 400°C

Bayonet

30 x 35

0.5m

50K40B

WRNT - 13

0 ÷400°C

explosion-proof

Ø6

50K40EX

WRKT - 01

0 ÷400°C

nut

30 x 35

50J40G

WRKT - 13

0 ÷400°C

explosion-proof

Ø6

50J40EX

Pt100

WZPT - 03

-100 ÷250°C

explosion-proof

Ø6

50PT95EX

Cu50

WZCT - 03

-50 ÷100°C

explosion-proof

Ø6

50PT40EX

Timers, relays and displaying devices Current measurement transformers

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Current measurement transformers MES - xx/xx type The measurement transformers find application at current measuring, current regulation, systems for current characteristics watching, systems for reactive energy compensation, signaling, etc. They are with x/5 gear ratio as X is the inlet range of the transformer.

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1; EN 60044-1; EN 60044-6

Technical data: * Maximum operating voltage: 720V; 50Hz * Admissible deviation of the operating current: 1.2 x In * Inlet current: 50 – 1200A * Outlet current: 5A * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min) * Operating temperature: -5-+65°C * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH * Precision class: 0.5 Mounting: *Current transformers can be DIN rail mounted; * vertically or horizontally to the power supplying rails according to the opening of the transformer * Current transformers can be mounted on flat surfaces by use of fixing clamps.

Overall dimensions Type

MES - 75/30 MES - 75/40 MES - 86/60

88 88 117

52 52 57

30 30 50

41 41 184

77 77 77

31 41 61

MES - 75/30 Range

Precision class

Capacity VA

Weight kg

Catalogue number

50/5 75/5 100/5 150/5

0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5

0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60

45050А 45075А 45103А 45153А

Range

Precision class

Capacity VA

Weight kg

Catalogue number

200/5 250/5 300/5 400/5 500/5 600/5

0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60

45204А 45254А 45304А 45404А 45504А 45604А

Weight kg

Catalogue number

0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60

45406А 45506А 45606А 45806А 45906А 45916А

MES - 75/40

5 5 10 10 10 15

MES - 86/60 Range

Precision class

400/5 500/5 600/5 800/5 1000/5 1200/5

0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

Capacity VA

15 15 15 15 15 15

Timers, relays and displaying devices Displaying measurement devices

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Digital voltmeter/amperemeter EKDP 15 A/V Digital device adjusted for DIN-rail mounting and offered in two types: -amperemeter -voltmeter It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It has high accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability. There is possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to measure constant current (AD,DV) and alternating current (AA,VA) quantities.

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1 Type

EKDP-15AA EKDP-15AD EKDP-15VA EKDP-15VD

Catalogue number

50117A 50117D 50116A 50116D

Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz * Inlet signal: - operating as voltmeter: 2 – 700V (the range is adjusted from inside) - operating as amperemeter: 5 – 2000A (the range is adjusted from inside) Note: At current range over 5A a current measurement transformer should be used * Consumption: <5A * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min) * Operating temperature: -5-+50°C * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH * Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale * Display: LCD * Weight: 150gr Mounting: * DIN-rail

inlet

захранване

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 61010-1

Type

Catalogue number

EKDP7-AV EKDP7-AA EKDP7-DV EKDP7-DA EKDP7-HZ

50106 50107 50108 50109 50110

Digital voltmeter/amperemeter and frequency meter EKDP7 Digital device adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards and offered in the following types: - amperemeter: EKDP7 – AA – amperemeter for alternating current EKDP7 – DA – amperemeter for direct current - voltmeter: EKDP7 – AV – voltmeter for alternating current EKDP7 – DV – voltmeter for direct current EKDP7 – Hz – frequency meter It is supplied with LCD display where the measurement quantity is displayed with numbers with 31/2 size. It has high accuracy of analogue-digital transfer, measurement precision and electromagnetic interference stability. There is possibility for adjustment of the measurement range through built in micro switches. Adjusted to measure direct current and alternating current quantities. Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 100 - 240V; 50Hz * Inlet signal: - operating as voltmeter: 2 – 700V (the range is adjusted from inside) - operating as amperemeter: 5 – 2000A (the range is adjusted from inside Note: For high current range a current measurement transformer should be used for alternating current device and a measurement shunt for direct current. * Consumption: <5A * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 4000V; 50Hz (1min) * Operating temperature: -5-+50°C * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH * Precision: 0.5% from the whole scale * Display: LCD * Weight: 130gr 0 Mounting: * on the front panel

Timers, relays and displaying devices Displaying measurement devices

www.elmarkgroup.eu

DIN Rail Mounted kWh Meters Electronic single and three phase kWh meters intended for DIN rail mounting and active energy measurement. Meters are suitable for home and commercial applications. They perform direct measurement of the real consumption of electric power and the results are shown on the LCD display. The system doesn’t need any additional adjustment or calibration. The range includes single and multi-tariff models.

DDS - 1Y - 45

Technical Specifications: * Direct power consumption measurement: up to 20 (80) А; 50/60Hz * Automatic temperature compensation * LED phase voltage outage indicator. * Indication for wrong cable connection * Indication for wrong measurement * Accuracy class: 1 * Number of tariffs: see the table below * Meter constant: See the table below Documents corresponding to the product: Standard IEC 61036 Measuring range

Type designation

DDS - 1Y - 45 DDS - 1Y - 100

DDS - 1Y - 100

Overall dimensions (mm) Catalogue number height / width / depth

Number of Tariffs

Meter constant (imp/kWh)

Voltage (V)

5 (45)

1000

230

63 / 18 / 118

50214

10 (100)

1600

230

65 / 76 / 100

50260 50280 50380

DDS - 1Y 80*

5 (80)

1600

230

65 / 76 / 100

DDS - 3Y 80*

20 (80)

800

3x230/400

65 / 76 / 100

* Note: The kWh meter is supplied with a built-in switch clock for the tariffs.

Analogue (pointer) panel meters SD72 type for build-in Analogue devices adjusted for mounting on the front panel of electrical boards. Designed for frequency measurement, capacity, alternating or direct voltage and current of the power supply grid, with overall dimensions 72x72mm. They are manufactured on the basis of bridge measurement schemes. There is possibility for display change for the higher scopes of measuring. DDS - 1Y/3Y 80

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60051-1 Тип на измерв. с-ма

Наименование панел метър

Kлас на точност

Oбхват

Забележка

Kаталожен номер

50118

0-100А

current transfer 100/5

654010

0-200А

current transfer 200/5

654020

0-400А

current transfer 400/5

654040

0-600А

current transfer 600/5

654060

0-1000А

current transfer 1000/5

654100

0-1500А

current transfer 1500/5

654150

0-500V

50125

МЕ

0.5

45-65Hz

50126

amperemeter АС

MEMSI

1.5

0-40А

amperemeter АС

MEMSI

1.5

amperemeter АС

MEMSI

1.5

amperemeter АС

MEMSI

1.5

amperemeter АС

MEMSI

1.5

amperemeter АС

MEMSI

1.5

amperemeter АС

MEMSI

1.5

voltmeter АС*

MEMSI

1.5

frequency meter** cosφ meter

MEMSI

1.5

3P 400V

50127

amperemeter DC

MEMC

1.5

0-5A

50128

amperemeter DC

MEMC

1.5

0-50A

outer resistor 60mV

50129

voltmeter DC

MEMC

1.5

0-50V

50130

voltmeter DC

MEMC

1.5

0-100V

50131

wattmeter

MEMSI

1.5

0-3000W 1P240V

50132

wattmeter

MEMSI

1.5

0-3000W 3P 3 line

50133

wattmeter

MEMSI

1.5

0-3000W 3P 4 line

50134

Note: MEMSI - magnetic-electrical movable steel instrument; MEMC – magnetic-electrical movable coil * Possibility for supplying with voltage transformer X/100V for range expanding ** Possibility for voltage 110, 230, 400V

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

Limit switches

www.elmarkgroup.eu The all-purpose limit switches are devices used in automatic systems as a control element. They are used for setting of gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They feature a vibration-resistant metal shell. Product conformity documentation: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 All-purpose limit switch – series CSA-xxx * Dielectric strength: 1000V AC * Insulating resistance: 100mΩ * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load * Mechanical endirance (number of cycles): 1 000 000 * Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s * Rated voltage: 230V Type * Rated current: up to 10A of the contact system * Protection degree: IP66 (4) (3) NO NO * Cable input: cable gland PG11 2 (1) (2) * Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm NC NC * Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

metal cylinder

800g

400g

2.0mm

5.8mm

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

800g

400g

2.0mm

5.8mm

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

800g

400g

2.0mm

5.8mm

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

100g

22.5°

Power of release

Switching position

100g

22.5°

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

22.5°

50mm

cylinder with metal roll

Type of the head

horizontal lever with metal roll

Type of the head

adjustable lever with metal roll

Type of the head

lever with metal roll

Type of the head

spring lever

400g

Power of starting

400g

Power of starting

150g

50g

95°

General movement

95°

Rated current

Type

10А-active CSA - 001 4А-inductive

Rated current

Type

10А-active CSA - 003 4А-inductive

Rated current

Type

10А-active CSA - 012 4А-inductive

Rated current

10А-active 4А-inductive

Rated current

10А-active 4А-inductive

Rated current

10А-active 4А-inductive

Type

CSA - 031

Type

CSA - 021

Type

CSA - 081

Catalogue number

46А001

Catalogue number

46А003

Catalogue number

46А012

Catalogue number

46А031

Catalogue number

46А021

Catalogue number

46А081

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

Limit switches

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The all-purpose limit switches are installed on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. The miniature limit switch is mounted in an aluminum shell, resistant to vibrations, lubricants and water. Product conformity documentation: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 All-purpose limit switch – series TZ-6xxx * Dielectric strength: 1000V AC * Insulating resistance: 100mΩ * Contact resistance: 15mΩ * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 000 * Gearing speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5 m/s Type of the contact system * Rated voltage: 230V NC * Protection degree: IP65 COM * Cable input: cable gland PG11 NO 2 * Section of power supply conductor: up to 1.5mm

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

metal cylinder

350g

115g

0.5mm

5.5mm

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

800g

240g

2mm

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

500g

100g

1mm

3.5mm

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

640g

230g

5mm

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

640g

230g

5mm

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

spring lever

150g

oil-resistant metal cylinder

Type of the head

oil-resistant cylinder with metal roll

Type of the head

oil-resistant horizontal lever with metal roll

Type of the head

oil-resistant vertical lever with metal roll

20°

5mm

6mm

General movement

6mm

General movement

Rated current

15А-active 5A-inductive

Rated current

15А-active 5A-inductive

Rated current

Type

TZ-6001

Type

TZ - 6101

Type

15А-active TZ - 6102 5A-inductive

Rated current

Type

15А-active TZ - 6104 5A-inductive

Rated current

15А-active 5A-inductive

Type

TZ -6143

Type

TZ - 6106

Catalogue number

466001

Catalogue number

466101

Catalogue number

466102

Catalogue number

466104

Catalogue number

466143

Catalogue number

466106

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

Limit switches

www.elmarkgroup.eu Limit switches of the CM series are used mainly as replacement of the limit switches of the TZ series or for setting the movement limits of some types of equipment. The switches are supplied with screw cable terminals. They can work at resistance loads as high as 15A, and are of single circuit type. Limit switches have high accuracy and can operate at wide variety of speeds. Items are compliant with the following standards: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 Universal Limit Switch – Series CM-1xxx * Dielectric Strength: 1000V AC * Insulation Resistance: 100mΩ min. (at 500VDC) * Contact Resistance: 5mΩ * Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 500 000 with non-inductive load * Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 5 000 000 Type * Operating frequency: 20 electrical operations/minute of the contact system * Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 1.0m/s NC * Rated voltage: 230V COM NO * Degree of protection: IP65 * Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

350g

114g

0.4mm

5.5mm

15А-active 5A-inductive

CM - 1307

468105

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

Cylinder and transverse metal roll

350g

114g

15А-active 5A-inductive

CM - 1309

468106

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

Cylinder longitudinal metal roll

350g

114g

0.4mm

5.5mm

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Metal cylinder

350g

114g

0.4mm

1.6mm

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

160g

22g

7.1mm

1.02mm

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

10g

20mm

5.6mm

Metal cylinder

Extended metal roll

Type of the head

Spring lever

0.4mm

5.5mm

15А-active СМ - 1308 5A-inductive

Rated current

Type

15А-active СМ - 1305 5A-inductive

Rated current

15А-active 5A-inductive

Rated current

15А-active 5A-inductive

Type

CM -1703

Type

CM - 1705

468109

Catalogue number

468110

Catalogue number

468113

Catalogue number

468117

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

Limit switches

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have small dimensions and a vibration-resistant metal shell with plastic lid, resistant to oil and water. Product conformity documentation: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 All-purpose limit switch – series TZ-8xxx * Dielectric strength: 1000V AC * Insulating resistance: 100MΩ * Contact Resistance: 25mΩ * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 5 000 000 * Gearing speed: 5mm/s to 0.5 m/s Type * Rated voltage: 230V of the contact system * Protection degree: IP40 (4) (3) NO NO * Cable input: cable gland PG11 2 (1) (2) * Section of power supply conductor: up to 2mm NC NC * Fastening strength of terminals: 6-8kgf/cm

Type of the head

Power of starting

lever with plastic roll

750g

Type of the head

Power of starting

adjustable lever with plastic roll

Type of the head

cylinder with metal roll

750g

Power of starting

900g

Type of the head

Power of starting

metal cylinder

900g

Type of the head

Power of starting

metal rod

Type of the head

spring lever

750g

Power of starting

150g

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

100g

20°

50°

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

100g

20°

50°

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

150g

1.5mm

4.0mm

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

150g

1.5mm

4.0mm

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

100g

20°

50°

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

30mm

Rated current

5А-active 3А-inductive

Rated current

5А-active 3А-inductive

Rated current

5А-active 3А-inductive

Rated current

5А-active 3А-inductive

Rated current

5А-active 3А-inductive

Rated current

5А-active 3А-inductive

Type

TZ - 8104

Type

TZ - 8108

Type

TZ - 8112

Catalogue number

468104

Catalogue number

468108

Catalogue number

468112

Type

Catalogue number

TZ - 8111

468111

Type

Catalogue number

TZ -8107

Type

TZ - 8167

468107

Catalogue number

468167

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

Limit switches

www.elmarkgroup.eu The all-purpose limit switches are devices used for setting gearing limits. They are mounted on transport lines, conveyors and other linear progressive motion machines. They have aluminium shell of high mechanic strength and resistance to oil, water and pressure. Product conformity documentation: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 All-purpose limit switch – series CWL-xxx * Dielectric strength: 1000V AC * Insulating resistance: 100mΩ * Contact resistance: 15mΩ * Electrical endurance (number of cycles): 500 000 with active load * Mechanical endurance (number of cycles): 10 000 000 * Gearing speed: 1mm/s to 2 m/s Type * Rated voltage: 230V of the contact system * Protection degree: IP66 (4) (3) NO NO * Cable input: cable gland (1) (2) * Metal shell NC NC * Vibration-resistant Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

metal cylinder

2720g

910g

2.0mm

6.4mm

10А-active 3А-inductive

CWLD

46LD

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

cylinder with metal roll

2720g

910g

2.0mm

5.6mm

10А-active 3А-inductive

CWLD2

46LD2

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

lever with metal roll

1360g

227g

20°

50°

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

adjustable lever with metal roll

2720g

910g

20°

50°

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

90±10°

10А-active 3А-inductive CWLCA2-2

Rated current

Type

46LCA2-2

Catalogue number

10А-active 3А-inductive CWLCA12-2-Q 46LCA12-2-Q

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

10А-active CWLCA32-41 46LCA32-41 3А-inductive 10А-active 46LNJ 3А-inductive CWLNJ

fork

1200g

55°

oil-resistant spring lever

150g

28mm

Type of the head

Power of starting

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

metal rod

142g

28g

20°

50°

10А-active 3А-inductive

CWLCL

46LCL

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

Limit switches

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Limit switches of the CZ 93 series are Safety Key Interlock Switches. They are used in object control systems with high safety requirements. The limit switch body is mounted to the fixed system component, while the safety key is mounted to the movable system component. System operation cannot start, unless a full interlocking is achieved. Safety key interlock switches can operate at up to 10A non-inductive resistance load, 3A lamp load and 5A inductive load. They have high operating accuracy at wide variety of speeds. These limit switches are available in two versions depending on the operating contacts number: 2NC and NO+NC Items are compliant with the following standards: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1 Universal Limit Switch – Series CZ93-xx Dielectric Strength: 2500V AC Insulation Resistance: 100mΩ min. (at 500VDC) Contact Resistance: 25mΩ Electrical Life (No. of cycles): 50 000 with non-inductive load Mechanical Life (No. of cycles): 2 000 000 Operating frequency: 30 electrical operations/minute Operating speed: 0.1mm/s to 0.5m/s Rated voltage: 230V Degree of protection: IP65 Type of the contact system

CZ93-K1

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

CZ-93BPG01 147N

29.4N

6 mm

28mm

CZ-93CPG01 147N

29.4N

6 mm

28mm

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

CZ-93BPG02 147N

29.4N

6 mm

28mm

CZ-93CPG02 147N

29.4N

6 mm

28mm

Power of release

Switching position

General movement

CZ-93BPG03 147N

29.4N

6 mm

28mm

CZ-93CPG03 147N

29.4N

6 mm

28mm

Type of the head

Power of starting

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

10А-active 3А-inductive 10А-active 3А-inductive

CZ93-K1

46CZ08

CZ93-K1

46CZ09

Rated current

Type

Catalogue number

10А-active 3А-inductive 10А-active 3А-inductive

CZ93-K2

46CZ10

CZ93-K2

46CZ11

Type

Catalogue number

CZ93-K2 Type of the head

CZ93-K3

Power of starting

Key Actuating

Type

Catalogue number

Horizontal

CZ 93 - K 1

46CZ931

Vertical

CZ 93 - K 2

46CZ932

Adjustable

CZ 93 - K 3

46CZ933

Rated current

10А-active 3А-inductive 10А-active 3А-inductive

CZ93-K3

46CZ12

CZ93-K3

46CZ13

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

Proximity sensor

www.elmarkgroup.eu Proximity induction sensors are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact surveillance of metal elements motion. They can also be used in other machine systems applications as no contact control sensors for level of liquids, control sensors for the speed and position of rotating chains, etc. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant. All-purpose proximity switch – series LM xx * Insulating resistance: ≥ 50 M Ω * Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm * Precision of repetition: 0.01 * Ambient temperature: -25˚С to +70˚С * Gearing speed: 5mm/s * Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC * Protection degree: IP 67 Object Start distance EL-LM8-3002NA 2 mm EL-LM8-3002NB 2 mm EL-LM8-3002PA 2 mm EL-LM8-3002PB 2 mm EL-LM8-2002A 2 mm Min. size of object: 8х8х1 Type

M8x1

EL-LM8

M12x1 58

M12x1

M18x1 30

M18x1

Start distance

EL-LM12-3004NA EL-LM12-3004NB EL-LM12-3004PA EL-LM12-3004PB EL-LM12-2004A

4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm

EL-LM18-3008NA EL-LM18-3008NB EL-LM18-3008PA EL-LM18-3008PB EL-LM18-2008A

70 60 10

Type

Terminal repeater

Power supply voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC

Type of transition NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR

Type of contact NO NC NO NC NO

Output load 130 mA 130 mA 130 mA 130 mA 150 mA

Catalogue number 46LM 8-32NA 46LM 8-32NB 46LM 8-32PA 46LM 8-32PB 46LM 8-22A

Power supply voltage

Type of transition

Type of contact

Output load

Catalogue number

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC

NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR

NO NC NO NC NO

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 300 mA

46LM 12-34NA 46LM 12-34NB 46LM 12-34PA 46LM 12-34PB 46LM 12-24A

Type

M22x1,5

EL-LM22-3010NA EL-LM22-3010NB EL-LM22-3010PA EL-LM22-3010PB EL-LM22-2010A

60 42

Start distance 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm

Power supply voltage

Type of transition

Type of contact

Output load

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC

NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR

NO NC NO NC NO

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 300 mA

Catalogue number 46LM 18-38NA 46LM 18-38NB 46LM 18-38PA 46LM 18-38PB 46LM 18-28A

Power supply voltage

Type of transition

Type of contact

Output load

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC

NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR

NO NC NO NC NO

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 300 mA

Catalogue number 46LM 22-30NA 46LM 22-30NB 46LM 22-30PA 46LM 22-30PB 46LM 22-20A

Min. size of object: 18х18х1

Switch

Min. size of object:: 15х15х1

LC circuit

EL-LM12

M22x1,5

Start distance 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm

Min. size of object: 22х22х1 50

Start distance

Power supply voltage

Type of transition

Type of contact

Output load

Catalogue number

EL-LM12-4002A

2 mm

230 V

inductive

100 mA

46LM 12-44A

EL-LM12-4004A

4 mm

230 V

inductive

300 mA

46LM 12-46A

M12x1

EL-LM18

Type

58 8

M12x1

Min. size of object: 15х15х1 70

M18x1

Start distance

Power supply voltage

Type of transition

Type of contact

Output load

Catalogue number

EL-LM18-4006A

5 mm

230 V

inductive

100 mA

46LM 18-44A

EL-LM18-4008A

8 mm

230 V

inductive

300 mA

46LM 18-48A

70 60 10

M18x1

EL-LM22

Type

Min. size of object: 18х18х1

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

Capacitive sensors

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Capacitive sensors are used in machine systems and equipment for no-contact motion surveillance. They consist of two coaxial electrodes, a condenser and RC generator. This type of sensors reacts to both metal and non-metal objects, as the gearing distance for non-metal objects depends on their dielectric constants. They allow gearing distance adjustment for non-magnetic conductive materials. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant. Capacitive sensors – series CM xx * Insulating resistance: ≥ 50 M Ω * Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 15 mm * Precision of repetition: 0.01 * Ambient temperature: -25˚С to +70˚С * Gearing speed: 5mm/s * Rated voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC * Protection degree: IP 54

EL-CM12

General scheme of a capacitive transducer

Object

EL-CM18 58

RC generator

Switch

Output amplifier stage

Start distance

Power supply voltage

Type of transition

Type of contact

Output load

Catalogue number

EL-CM12-3004NA EL-CM12-3004NB EL-CM12-3004PA EL-CM12-3004PB

0~4 mm 0~4 mm 0~4 mm 0~4 mm

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

NPN NPN PNP PNP

NO NC NO NC

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

46CM 12-32NA 46CM 12-32NB 46CM 12-32PA 46CM 12-32PB

Type of transition NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR

Type of contact NO NC NO NC NO

M12x1

Type

M18x1 70 60

EL-CM18-3008NA EL-CM18-3008NB EL-CM18-3008PA EL-CM18-3008PB EL-CM18-2008A

Power supply voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC

Output load 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 300 mA

Catalogue number 46CM 18-38NA 46CM 18-38NB 46CM 18-38PA 46CM 18-38PB 46CM 18-28A

M18x1

EL-CM24

Start distance 0~8 mm 0~8 mm 0~8 mm 0~8 mm 0~8 mm

Type

4 75

Power supply voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 230 VAC

Type of transition NPN NPN PNP PNP SCR

Type of contact NO NC NO NC NO

Output load 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 300 mA

Catalogue number 46CM 24-12NA 46CM 24-12NB 46CM 24-12PA 46CM 24-12PB 46CM 24-12A

Type

Start distance

Power supply voltage

Type of transition

Type of contact

Output load

Catalogue number

EL-SM12-3110NA EL-SM12-3110NB EL-SM18-3110PA EL-SM18-3110PB

10 mm 10 mm 10 mm 10 mm

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

NPN NPN PNP PNP

NO NC NO NC

200 mA 200 mA 200 mA 200 mA

46SM 12-31NA 46SM 12-31NB 46SM 18-31PA 46SM 18-31PB

Power supply voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

Type of transition inductive inductive inductive inductive

Type of contact NO NC NO NC

Output load 100 mA 100 mA 300 mA 300 mA

Catalogue number 46XM 18-35A 46XM 18-35B 46XM 24-38A 46XM 24-38B

EL-CM24-3012NA EL-CM24-3012NB EL-CM24-3012PA EL-CM24-3012PB EL-CM24-2012A

75 47

Start distance 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm

Type M24x1,5

Inductive surface

M24x1,5

35 4

EL-SM12 M12x1

Note: Sensor of Hal

65 50

M18x1

Type EL-XM18-305PMI EL-XM18-305PMU EL-XM24-308PMI EL-XM24-308PMU

Start distance 5 mm 5 mm 8 mm 8 mm

Note: MI -current type MU - voltage type

EL-XM18

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

Photoelectrical sensors

www.elmarkgroup.eu Photoelectrical sensors of the Gxx series are all-purpose switches used in machine systems and equipment for no contact surveillance of motion of elements. They are based on the photoelectric principle of operation – inside the sensor there is a photo signal emitter and receiver of the returned signal. There are three types of sensors: diffuse sensors, reflector sensors and emitter-receiver sensors. These types of sensors differ in the way of returning the signal. They allow for gearing distance adjustment. They are developed on the base of PNP and NPN transition. They have small dimensions and feature a metal cylindrical shell resistant to vibrations and a plastic lid which is oil and water resistant.

EL-G12

Technical features: * Insulating resistance: ≥ 50 M Ω * Gearing distance: from 2 mm to 7 mm * Precision of repetition: 0.01 * Ambient temperature: -25˚С to +70˚С * Gearing speed: 5mm/s * Ratedl voltage: 6~36VDC; 90~230VAC * Protection degree: IP 67 Truth beam type

Emitter

Receiver

Object

EL-G18

Type

Start distance

Power supply voltage

Type of transition

Type of contact

Type of sensor

Catalogue number

EL-G12-3A07NA EL-G12-3A07PA EL-G12-3B1NA EL-G12-3B1PA EL-G12-3C3NA EL-G12-3C3PA

70 mm 70 mm 1m 1m 3m 3m

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP

Ø12; l=50 Ø12; l=50 Ø12; l=50 Ø12; l=50 Ø12; l=50 Ø12; l=50

Diffuse Diffuse Reflector Reflector Truth beam Truth beam

46G12A071 46G12A072 46G123B11 46G123B12 46G123C11 46G123C12

Type

Start distance

Power supply voltage

Type of transition

Type of contact

Type of sensor

Catalogue number

EL-G18-3A10NA EL-G18-3A10PA EL-G18-3B2NA EL-G18-3B2PA EL-G18-3C5NA EL-G18-3C5PA

100 mm 100 mm 2m 2m 5m 5m

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP

Ø18; l=70 Ø18; l=70 Ø18; l=70 Ø18; l=70 Ø18; l=70 Ø18; l=70

Diffuse Diffuse Reflector Reflector Truth beam Truth beam

46G18A101 46G18A102 46G183B11 46G183B12 46G185C11 46G185C12

Type

Start distance

Power supply voltage

Type of transition

Type of contact

Type of sensor

Catalogue number

EL-G30-3A70NA EL-G30-3A70PA EL-G30-3B3NA EL-G30-3B3PA EL-G30-3C101NA EL-G30-3C101PA

500 mm 500 mm 3m 3m 10 m 10 m

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP

Ø22; l=70 Ø22; l=70 Ø22; l=70 Ø22; l=70 Ø22; l=70 Ø22; l=70

Diffuse Diffuse Reflector Reflector Truth beam Truth beam

46G30A101 46G30A102 46G303B11 46G303B12 46G305C11 46G305C12

Type

Start distance

Power supply voltage

Type of transition

Type of contact

Type of sensor

Catalogue number

EL-G35-3A50NA EL-G35-3A50PA EL-G35-3B3NA EL-G35-3B3PA EL-G35-3C5NA EL-G35-3C5PA

500 mm 500 mm 3m 3m 5m 5m

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP

NO NO NO NO NO NO

Diffuse Diffuse Reflector Reflector Truth beam Truth beam

46G35A101 46G35A102 46G353B11 46G353B12 46G355C11 46G355C12

Type

Start distance

Power supply voltage

Type of transition

Type of contact

Type of sensor

Catalogue number

EL-G50-3A30NA EL-G50-3A30PA EL-G50-3B4NA EL-G50-3B4PA EL-G50-3C5NA EL-G50-3C5PA

500 mm 500 mm 4m 4m 5m 5m

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP

NO NO NO NO NO NO

Diffuse Diffuse Reflector Reflector Truth beam Truth beam

46G50A101 46G50A102 46G503B11 46G503B12 46G505C11 46G505C12

Type

Start distance

Power supply voltage

Type of transition

Type of contact

Type of sensor

Catalogue number

EL-BZJ-211 EL-BZJ-311 EL-BZJ-411

10 mm 9mm 9mm

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC

Reflector Reflector Reflector

NO NO NO

Colour detector Colour detector Colour detector

46BZJ211 46BZJ311 46BZJ411

Рефлекторен тип

Emitter Receiver

Object

EL-G30

Diffuse type

Emitter

EL-G35

EL-G50

EL-BZJ

Object

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

100

Float switches

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Float switches

Float switches of the type QW-xx-xx are sealed units for direct pump control. They are intended for continuous liquid level maintenance in pools, tanks or ponds exercised through direct control of the pumping in or out process in the respective reservoir. They are pre-wired and depending on the chosen configuration can control either the pumping in, or pumping out of the reservoir. They allow direct control of single phase pumps with mounted power of 1 kW. Float switches are waterproof.

DHC1Y - SD

The automatic level control units of the DHC1Y-xx series are intended for mounting on pumping control panels. They do not use any additional sensors, but conductive probes to contact the liquid. The unit sends low (harmless) voltage signals to the probes and once a contact between a probe and liquid is established, the unit changes its contactors' state. Units are available in three variants with different number of control contacts suitable for different applications. Each contact can transfer current of up to 5A, which is enough to ensure control over the powerful pumps' contactors or to directly control pumps with mounted power of 1 kW. The automatic level control units can be installed on a DIN rail.

QW - 70AB

Type

Number of probes (No. of levels)

DHC1Y - S DHC1Y - SD DHC1Y - T

1 3 1

Type

No. of levels

QW - M 15 - 3 QW - 70AB

2 2

Output Load (A)

5 5 5

Output Load (A)

6 4

Accuracy

Operating Voltage (V)

Note

Catalogue No.

±1% ±1% ±1%

230 230 230

2 pumps control

46DW001 46DW002 46DW003

Accuracy

Operating Voltage (V)

Note

Catalogue No.

±1% ±1%

230 230

46DW004 46DW005

QW - M 15 - 3

Power supplies The DRP-xx-xx series of power supplies are voltage reduction and rectification units ideally suited to provide stable power supply of systems and equipment for contact-free movement monitoring elements (such as inductive, capacity and photo sensors, logic elements and systems, etc.). They have small overall dimensions and can be installed on a DIN rail. The power units have metal or plastic cases resistant to vibrations and plastic oil- and waterproof covers. They are able to provide stable output voltage at comparatively fluctuating input voltage. Devices have built-in overload and short circuit protection, allowing short time overload of up to 130%. Power supplies are available with various output voltages (5, 12, 15 and 24 V DC) and different output power rates. Technical Specifications: ·Input voltage: 80 ~ 230V AC ·Over-voltage: 115 ~ 135% of the rated output voltage ·Overload: 120 ~ 120% of the rated output power ·Terminals: Input – 2 screw terminals; Output: 4 screw terminals; ·Protection level: IP44 ·Power indicator ·Installation: DIN rail ·Cooling: Free air cooling convection Type Designation

Input Voltage (V)

Output Load (A)

Tolerance

Power (W)

Dimensions W/H/L (mm)

Catalogue No.

DR - 45 -5 DR - 45 - 12 DR - 45 - 15 DR - 45 - 24

5 12 15 24

5 3.5 2.8 2

±2% ±1% ±1% ±1%

25 42 42 48

78 / 93 / 56 78 / 93 / 56 78 / 93 / 56 78 / 93 / 56

46DR455 46DR4512 46DR4515 46DR4524

Type Designation

Input Voltage (V)

Output Load (A)

Tolerance

Power (W)

Dimensions W/H/L (mm)

Catalogue No.

12 24 24

6.3 3.2 10

±2% ±1% ±1%

75 75 240

55.5 / 125.3 / 100 55.5 / 125.3 / 100 125.5 / 125.3 / 100

46DR7512 46DR4524 46DR2424

DR - 75 -12 DR - 75 - 24 DRP - 240 - 24

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

101

Rotary switches

www.elmarkgroup.eu Rotary switches LW26 series The rotary switches LW26 series are produced for switching on/off electrical circuits with commutated current from 20 to 160A. They are designed on the bases of the rotor-eccentric switching on which is realized through turning of the handle to 60 or 90 degrees. The normal operation is used for commutation of two, three or four conductor systems. There are special rotary switches that switch on under given connection schemes and are used to control motors, electric welding machines and other consumers. Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-3-1 Technical data: * Power supply voltage: 230/400V; 50Hz * Insulation voltage: 690V * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V * Mechanical wear resistance: 3x105 commutation cycles * Operating temperature: -10 - +50°C * Humidity: 35 – 85% RH * Commuting capacity: up to 160A according to the tables * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * : - IP42 for the ordinary breakers mounted in a panel - IP65 for the breakers offered in a box * Cable connection: screw joining * Tightening moment of the bolt: 1.33N * Maximum section of the power supply conductors: according to the dimensions table * Weight: according to the number of the contacts Mounting: * directly to the control panel * thickness of the surface to which it is mounted: max 5mm * дебелина на повърхността: max 5mm

Dimensions Designation

Front panel

Joining conductor (mm2)

LW26-20

M1 panel

1x2.5

M1 panel with inscription field

Overall dimensions (mm) A

Mounting dimensions (mm) L

22 + 9.6n

Ø8.5 Ø4.5

22 + 9.6n

Ø8.5 Ø4.5

LW26-25

M1 panel

1x4.0

45.2

23+12.8n

Ø8.5 Ø4.5

LW26-32

M2 panel

1x6.0

29.2 + 12.8n

Ø10

Ø4.5

LW26-63

M2 panel

1x16

29.2 + 21.5n

Ø10

Ø4.5

LW26-125

M3 panel

1x35

35 + 26.5n

Ø13

Ø6

LW26-160

M3 panel

1x50

35 + 32.5n

Ø13

Ø6

* n - number of modules

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

102

Rotary switches

www.elmarkgroup.eu Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

Catalogue number

Q10 three-poles switching on; motor starting and stopping; voltage turning on/off to the consumers

20 25 32 63 125 160

2 2 2 2 2 2

LW26 - 20Q LW26 - 25Q LW26 - 32Q LW26 - 63Q LW26 - 125Q LW26 - 160Q

492201 492251 492321 492631 492951 492961

Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

Catalogue number

20 25 32 63

2 2 2 2

LW26GS - 20/04 LW26GS - 25/04 LW26GS - 32/04 LW26GS - 63/04

492207 492257 492327 492637

Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

Catalogue number

N11 3-position â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 2 start positions and 1 stop; for motor reversing

20 25 32 63 125 160

3 3 3 3 3 3

LW26 - 20N LW26 - 25N LW26 - 32N LW26 - 63N LW26 - 125N LW26 - 160N

492202 492252 492322 492632 492952 492962

Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

Catalogue number

25 63 125 160

4 4 4 4

Q11 three-poles switching over; motor starting and stopping; voltage turning on/off to the consumers; possibility for access control

S19 3-position â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 2 start positions and 1 stop; for two speed motor control; switching over between charging*

Note: It is necessary that additional bridges be placed at switching over between charging

LW26 - 25S LW26 - 63S LW26 - 125S LW26 - 160S

492253 492633 492953 492963

Elements for automation, monitoring and control 103

Rotary switches

www.elmarkgroup.eu Scheme

S21 3-position switching on star/delta

In (A)

25 63

Levels

Type number

Catalogue number

4 4

LW26 - 25 SD LW26 - 63 SD

492025 492063

Levels

Type number

Catalogue number

3 3

LW26 - 32H 5881/3 LW26 - 63H 5881/3

492324 492634

Scheme

H5881/3 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 85 for welding transformer windings switching over

In (A)

32 63

Scheme

YH5/3 - 66 for voltage switching over

In (A)

Levels

Type number

LW26 - 20 YH5/3

Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

LH3/3 - 58 for amperemeter switching on to current transformers

LW26 - 20 LH3/3

Scheme

Type number

IP code IP

LW26 - 20-25-Q LW26 - 32-Q

42 42

Box for LW26-20/25 Box for LW26-32 Adaptor for DIN-rail for LW26-20/25

LW26 - 20-25-DIN

Catalogue number

492205

Catalogue number

492206

Catalogue number

492037 492038 492039

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

104

Rotary switches

www.elmarkgroup.eu Scheme

4.I7168/7

In (A)

Levels

Type number

LW26 4.I7168/7

Catalogue №

492028

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

2 5

4.I7168/7

Scheme

4.H6518/5

In (A)

Levels

Type number

LW26 4.H6518/5

Catalogue №

492029

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

2 3

7 6

4.H6518/5

Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

Catalogue №

LW30-20

492030

LW30-32

492031

LW30-40

492033

LW30-63

492034

LW30-20-100A ON/OFF switch 3 poles

* Possibility for access control

IP55

Scheme

In (A)

Levels

Type number

Catalogue №

LW30-32

LW30-32 IP54

492032

* Possibility for access control

LW30-20-100A ON/OFF switch 3 poles

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

105

Buttons and LED indicators

www.elmarkgroup.eu Buttons and LED indicators These are devices used in control and indication systems, command boards and panels in industrial automation systems. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to control the switching on or off executive mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The devices endure short time current overload up to 10A, and normally they can commutate thermal current up to 6A in their contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which operational conductors with section up to 2.5mm2 can be joined. Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard: EN 60947-1; EN 60947-5-1

Overall dimensions Diagram for drill the openings

Technical data: * Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V; * Rated current: 6A (230V AC); 0.3A (230V DC) * Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG outside in the circuit * Mechanical wear resistance: 1x106 commutation cycles * Power of mechanical compression: - at closing: 20N - at opening: 8N * Operating temperature: -20 - +70°C * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH * Tightening moment of the joining conductors: 0.15Nm * Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5; 1x2.5mm2 Mounting: * to a flat metal or plastic surface with thickness: max 4mmова повърхност с дебелина : max 4mm * отвор с големина: Ø22.5mm Type

Description

Type of contacts

Rated current (А) at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

EL 2- BA 21 EL 2- BA 31 EL 2- BA 51 EL 2- BA 61 EL 2- BA 42

Button round with spring reverse

NO NO NO NO NC

6 6 6 6 6

black green yellow blue red

401021 401031 401051 401061 401042

Type

Description

Type of contacts

Rated current (А) at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

green

401032

EL 2- BР 31 Button round with spring reverse EL 2- BР 42

Note

IP=65 Provided from silicon lid

red

401043

IP=65 Provided from silicon lid

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

106

Buttons and LED indicators

www.elmarkgroup.eu Type

Description

Voltage for the indicator

Rated current (А) at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

24V 24V 24V 24V 110V 110V 110V 110V 230V 230V 230V 230V

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

red green yellow blue red green yellow blue red green yellow blue

401474 401374 401574 401674 401473 401373 401573 401673 401471 401371 401571 401671

Note

EL 2- BW3471 EL 2- BW3371 EL 2- BW3571 EL 2- BW3671 EL 2- BW3471 EL 2- BW3371 EL 2- BW3571 EL 2- BW3671 EL 2- BW3471 EL 2- BW3371 EL 2- BW3571 EL 2- BW3671

Button round with spring reverse and LED indicator

Type

Description

Type of contacts

Rated current (А) at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

Note

EL 2- BD 21

Switch with arrest

1NO

black

401421

two-position

EL 2- BD 33

Switch with arrest

2NО

black

401433

three-position

Type

Description

Type of contacts

Rated current (А) at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

Note

EL 2- BС 42

Button with head “mushroom” type

1NС

red

401642

Type

Description

Type of contacts

Rated current (А) at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

Note

EL 2- BS 545

Button with head “mushroom” type

1NС + 1NO

red

401545

elease with spinning

spring reverse

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

107

Buttons and LED indicators

www.elmarkgroup.eu Type

Description

Button double

EL 2- BW8475

Type

Description

EL 2- BG 21

Change-over switch with switch

Type of contacts

Rated current (А) at 400V

1NO+1NС

Type of contacts

Rated current (А) at 400V

1NO

Colour

Catalogue number

401845

Colour

Catalogue number

401121

Note

Green and red button + LED indicator

Note

two-position with switch

AD56-22

LED индикация

EL02 - BЕ10x

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 230V AC 230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC 230V AC 110V AC 24V AC/DC

white white white amber amber amber green green green blue blue blue yellow yellow yellow red red red

AD56-22-W-230 AD56-22-W-110 AD56-22-W-24 AD56-22-А-110 AD56-22-А-24 AD56-22-А-230 AD56-22-РG-230 AD56-22-РG-110 AD56-22-РG-24 AD56-22-B-230 AD56-22-B-110 AD56-22-B-24 AD56-22-Y-230 AD56-22-Y-110 AD56-22-Y-24 AD56-22-R-230 AD56-22-R-110 AD56-22-R-24

401123 401111 401124 401211 401224 401223 401323 401311 401324 401523 401511 401524 401723 401711 401724 401423 401411 401424

Type of the contact

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

1 NO

green

EL02 - BЕ101

401001

1 NC

red

EL02 - BЕ102

401002

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

108

Buttons and LED indicators

www.elmarkgroup.eu EL1 - B134

Overall dimensions (mm)

Type of the contact

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

1 NO

black

EL1-B134

401134

Type of the contact

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

switching on 0-1

IP44

EL1 - B102

Overall dimensions (mm)

1 NO

green

EL1-B102

401102

1 NO

green

EL1-BP102

401132

Type of the contact

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

EL1-B213

401213

EL1-BP213

401233

Type number

Catalogue number

EL1-B339

401339

EL1-BP339

401349

1 button with spring return Ip44

1 button with spring return Ip65

IP44/65

EL1 - B213

Overall dimensions (mm)

104

2 buttons with spring return Ip44 2 buttons with spring return Ip65

1 NC

1 - red

1 NO

1 - green

1 NC

1 - red

1 NO

1 - green

IP44/65

EL1 - B339

Overall dimensions (mm)

134

3 buttons with spring return Ip44 3 buttons with spring return Ip65

134

IP44/65

EL1 - B174 Overall dimensions (mm) Emergency button with head “mushroom” L H W type Ø40

Release through turning

IP44

Type of the contact

Colour

1 NO

1 - green

1 NC

1 - red

1 NO

1 - green

1 NO

1 - green

1 NC

1 - red

1 NO

1 - green

Type of the contact

Colour

Type number

Catalogue number

1 NC

red

EL1-B174

401174

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

109

Buttons and LED indicators for DIN-rail

These are devices used in control and indication systems adjusted for mounting in command boards and panels directly on DIN-rail. They are manufactured to commutate controlling circuits and to control the switching on or off executive mechanisms such as relays, contactors, etc. The signal lamps and indicators find broad application in all industrial fields. The devices endure short time current overload up to 20A, and normally they can commutate current up to 10A with their contact system. The connection to the contact terminals is through screw terminals to which operational conductors with section up to 2.5mm2 can be joined. There are also designed buttons combined with lamps. 45±0.31

35±0.5

71 -0.43 66±0.37 49.5±0.31

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60 947-5-1

Technical data: * Insulation voltage: 660V; 50/60Hz * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 6000V; * Rated current: up to 10A (230V AC) * Short circuit protection: safety device 10A gG outside in the circuit * Rated consumed current (for indicators and buttons combined with indicators): <20mA * wear resistance (indicators): >2000h * Mechanical wear resistance (buttons): 1x106 commutation cycles * Power of mechanical compression: - at closing: 20N - at opening: 8N * Operating temperature: -20 - +70°C * Humidity: 35 – 85%RH * Tightening moment of the joining conductors: 0.15Nm * Section of the conductor: 1x0.5; 1x0.75; 1x1; 1x1.5; 1x2.5mm2 Mounting: * to a DIN-rail * Altitude: up to 2000m

Type

Description

Rated current (A) at 400V

Colour

Type of contacts

Catalogue number

ELB - BL - DIN ELB - BL - DIN ELB - G - DIN ELB - G -DIN ELB - Y - DIN ELB - Y - DIN ELB - R - DIN ELB - R - DIN

button button button button button button button button

<10 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10 <10

black black green green yellow yellow red red

2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC

401505 401506 401507 401508 401509 401510 401512 401513

Tип

Description

Voltage (V)

Rated current (A) at 400V

Colour

Catalogue number

230V 230V 230V 230V 230V

<20 <20 <20 <20 <20

green red yellow blue white

401500 401501 401502 401503 401504

ELD - G - DIN ELD - R - DIN ELD - Y - DIN ELD - B - DIN ELD -W - DIN

lamp lamp lamp lamp lamp

Type

Description

Voltage (V)

Rated current (A) at 400V

Colour

Type of contacts

Catalogue number

ELBD - G - DIN ELBD -G - DIN ELBD - R - DIN ELBD - R - DIN ELBD - Y - DIN ELBD - Y - DIN

button + lamp button + lamp button + lamp button + lamp button + lamp button + lamp

230V 230V 230V 230V 230V 230V

<20 <20 <20 <20 <20 <20

green green red red yellow yellow

2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC 2NO+ 1 NC 1NO+ 2 NC

401514 401515 401516 401517 401518 401519

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

110

Devices for telpher control

www.elmarkgroup.eu Devices for telpher control MBP type

They represent different combinations of START and STOP buttons mounted in plastic boxes in different sizes. They are connected to the operating circuits of cranes or telphers and serve as a remote control of their movement. They are connected directly to the operating cable of the telpher and send commands directly to the executive mechanisms. They are designed to provide protection from dust and moisture IP65. Technical data: * Supplying voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz * Consumed power: <5VA * Electrical wear resistance: 1x105 cycles * Operating temperature: -10 +40°C * Dampness: 35 – 85% RH * Number of contacts: according to the number of the buttons * Commuting capacity: up to 6A * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * IP code: IP65 * Weight: according to the number of the contacts Mounting: * directly to the control cable of the telpher (crane) They represent different combinations of START and STOP buttons mounted in plastic boxes in different sizes. They are stop button type М В Р - А to х хthe х х operating connected circuits of cranes or telphers and serve as a remote control of their movement. They are button type – one-speed or two-speed (x91) connected directly to the operating cable of the(x81) telpher and send commands directly to the executive mechanisms. They number of buttons are designed to provide protection from dust and moisture IP65.

Number of buttons Contact block and scheme Technical data: * Supplying voltage: 230V; 50/60Hz For the directions * Consumed power: <5VA Emergency * Electrical wear resistance: 1x105 cycles * Operating2temperature: -10 +40°C NO+NC * Dampness: 35 – 85% RH * Number of2 contacts: according of the buttons - to the number NO+NC * Commuting capacity: up to 6A * Plastic: UV resistancebutton 2+1rays wearemergency NO+NC * IP code: IP65 emergency * Weight: according to the numberbutton of the contacts 2+1 NO+NC with switch Mounting: * directly to2+1 the control emergency cable of thebutton telpher (crane) NO+NC

Type

Catalogue number

Package

MBP-A281

46281

MBP-A291

46291

MBP-A2813

46283

MBP-A2813К

46283K

MBP-A2913

46294

two-speed

NO+NC

MBP-A481

46481

NO+NC

MBP-A491

46491

4+1

emergency button

NO+NC

MBP-A4813

46483

4+1

emergency button with switch

NO+NC

MBP-A4813К

46483K

4+1

emergency button

NO+NC

MBP-A4913

46493

NO+NC

MBP-A681

46681

NO+NC

MBP-A691

46691

6+1

emergency button

NO+NC

MBP-A6813

46683

6+1

emergency button with switch

NO+NC

MBP-A6813K

46683K

6+1

emergency button

NO+NC

MBP-A6913

46693

NO+NC

MBP-A881

46881

NO+NC

MBP-A891

46891

8+1

emergency button

NO+NC

MBP-A8813

46883

8+1

emergency button with switch

NO+NC

MBP-A8813K

46883K

8+1

emergency button

NO+NC

MBP-A8913

46893

two-speed

Elements for automation, monitoring and control

111

Warning lights and towers Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1 EN 60 947-5-1

www.elmarkgroup.eu Warning lights and towers The revolving warning lights and towers are devices intended for use as status indicators in the human-machine control systems. They are suitable for installation on control cabinets and panels or directly on machines. They are manufactured in different color combinations to attract attention of operators working in a given production sector. Warning lights and towers are widely used in almost any industrial branch. They can be mounted on movable components or such, creating potential danger and can warn all workers for a critical situation with their blinking light and siren. These devices are electrically connected through cables, protruding out of the lamp casing. Technical Specification: ·Rated voltage: 230V; 50/60 Hz; ·Isolation voltage: 600V; 50/60 Hz; ·Impulse voltage stability: 6000V ·Rated power: see the tables below ·Short circuit protection: 1A gG external fuse ·Operating Temperature: - 20 oC + 70 oC ·Humidity: 35 – 85% RH ·Plastic cover: UV resistant polycarbonate not considered as being harmful to human health Installation: * Warning lights are fixed to the respective machine body with the studs protruding from the light plastic casing. Type

LTE1101 - R LTE1101 - G LTE1101 - Y LTE1101J - R LTE1101J - G LTE1101J - Y LTE1101 - R LTE1101 - G LTE1101 - Y LTE1101J - R LTE1101J - G LTE1101J - Y

Type

LTE1161 - R LTE1161 - G LTE1161 - Y LTE1161 - R LTE1161 - G LTE1161 - Y

Description

Warning light Warning light Warning light Warning light + siren Warning light + siren Warning light + siren Warning light Warning light Warning light Warning light + siren Warning light + siren Warning light + siren

Description

Warning light Warning light Warning light Warning light Warning light Warning light

Voltage (V)

12 12 12 12 12 12 230 230 230 230 230 230

Voltage (V)

12 12 12 230 230 230

Rated Power (W)

10 10 10 11 11 11 8 8 8 9 9 9

Rated Power (W)

35 35 35 28 28 28

Colour

Red Green Yellow Red Green Yellow Red Green Yellow Red Green Yellow

Colour

Red Green Yellow Red Green Yellow

Catalogue number

401525R 401525G 401525Y 401526R 401526G 401526Y 402525R 402525G 402525Y 402526R 402526G 402526Y

Catalogue number

401527R 401527G 401527Y 402527R 402527G 402527Y

LTA Type

Description

MS-290B

MS-390

Voltage (V)

Rated Power (W)

Colour

Catalogue number

LTA205 - 1 LTA205 - 2 LTA205 - 3 LTA205 - 3J LTA205 - 5

Tower Tower Tower Tower + siren Tower

12 12 12 12 12

4 8 12 12 18

1 - Red 2 - Red/Green 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 5 - Red/Yellow/Green/ Blue/Transparent

401528 401529 401530 401531 401532

LTA205 - 1 LTA205 - 2 LTA205 - 3 LTA205 - 3J LTA205 - 5

Tower Tower Tower Tower + siren Tower

230 230 230 230 230

6 8 10 11 14

1 - Red 2 - Red/Green 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 3 - Red/Yellow/Green 5 - Red/Yellow/Green/ Blue/Transparent

402528 402529 402530 402531 402532

Sound level (dB)

Catalogue number

100 120 85 85 85 85

401533 401534 401535 401536 401537 401538 401539 401540

CB-4B

FA-01

Type

Description

Voltage (V)

MS-290A MS-390 CB-4 CB-4 CB-4 CB-4 FA-01 FA-01

siren siren alarm bell alarm bell alarm bell alarm bell fire alarm fire alarm

230 230 12 24 110 230 24 230

Rated Power (W)

60 160

G10

Security sensors

112

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Catalogue number: 46DS400

G11

Catalogue number: 46DS402

Catalogue number: 46DS403

Security sensors Motion Infrared Sensor ST07 Motion detector with built-in infrared sensor, sensitive to changes in the infrared spectre. Once the sensor detects movement within the detector's range, it sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the system. Applications: * Lights switching on at motion detection. * Security system activation at motion detection. Technical Specifications: * Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz * Rated Load:1200W * Detection Range: 360° * Reach: 6 m (max. <24°) * Light Control: <10Lux * Time Setting: 5 sec., 1 min, 5 min, 8 min * Reaction to movement with speed of: 0.6 ~ 1.5 m/s * Operating Temperature: - 20 ºC ~ 40 ºC * Humidity: < 93% RH Installation: ceiling mounting

Motion Infrared Sensor ST 01 Motion detector with built-in infrared sensor, sensitive to changes in the infrared spectre or to sound effects. Once the sensor detects movement within the detector's range, it sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the system. Applications: * Lights switching on at motion detection. * Security system activation at motion detection. Technical Specifications: * Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz * Rated Load: 500W * Detection Range: >140° * Reach: 12m (max. <24°) * Detection System:infrared radar * Light Control : < 2Lux~1000Lux * Time Setting: from 5 sec to 9 min * Reaction to movement with speed of: 0.6 ~ 1.5 m/s * Sound control sensitivity: adjustable 30db ~ 90dB * Installation: wall mounting 0.4~1.8m; mounting into round console box for concrete and brick * Humidity: < 93% RH

Motion Infrared Sensor ST 08 Motion detector with built-in infrared sensor, sensitive to changes in the infrared spectre or to sound effects. Once the sensor detects movement within the detector's range, it sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the system. The sensor is intended for outdoor use. Applications: * Lights switching on at motion detection. * Security system activation at motion detection. Technical Specifications: * Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz * Rated Load:1200W * Detection Range:180° * Reach: 9 m (max. <24°) * Detection System:infrared radar * Light Control:< 3Lux ~ daylight * Time Setting: 5 sec to 9 min * Reaction to movement with speed of: 0.6 ~ 1.5 m/s * Degree of Protection: IP44 * Operating Temperature: - 20 ºC ~ 40 ºC * Humidity: < 93% RH * Installation: 0.5 ~ 3.5 m

Security sensors Security sensors

Catalogue number: 46DS404

Catalogue number: 46DS405

Catalogue number: 46DS406

113

www.elmarkgroup.eu Smoke Alarm ST82 Smoke alarm with photoelectric sensor. Whenever the sensor detects presence of smoke in the room as a result of fire, the photoelectric sensor sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the alarm. Applications: · Fire alarm activation at detecting smoke in the room. Technical Specifications: · Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz · Output Load:10 mA · Alarm Sound: 85dB(3m) · Operating Temperature: - 10 oC ~ 40 oC · Humidity: < 93% RH · Low Voltage Alarm: 5.5V~6.2V · Support Battery: 7 ~ 15 days · Installation: ceiling mounting

Smoke Alarm ST85-2 Smoke alarm with photoelectric sensor. Whenever the sensor detects presence of smoke in the room as a result of fire, the photoelectric sensor sends a signal to the microprocessor to activate the alarm. Suitable for incorporation in building fire and security systems. Applications: · Fire alarm activation at detecting smoke in the room. Technical Specifications: · Power Supply: 12/24 V DC · Output Load:17 mA · Alarm Sound: 85dB(3m) · Operating Temperature: - 5 oC ~ 40 oC · Humidity: < 93% RH · Installation: ceiling mounting

Gas Leak Alarm ST 401 A gas leak sensor reacting to the presence of certain gases in closed rooms. It is powered by a standard electricity socket and whenever gas concentration reaches dangerous levels the sensor alarm switches on. It has a built-in LCD display to show level of exposure. Applications: · Alarm activation at detecting presence of gas in a closed room. Technical Specifications: · Power Supply: 230VAC, 50/60 Hz · Output Load:4W · Detection Ranges: propane-butane (LPG) 0.1 ~ 0.3%; natural gas 0.1 ~ 0.3%; coal gas: 0.1 ~ 0.3% · Alarm Sound: 85dB(3m) · Operating Temperature: - 10 oC ~ 50 oC · Storage Temperature: - 25 oC ~ 55 oC

Water Leak Alarm ST 401 The water leak sensor is intended for installation in rooms endangered by flooding. It is powered by a 9V battery. Whenever humidity level reaches a certain value, the sensor sends a signal for flooding danger and alarm switches on. Applications: · Alarm activation at detecting water in a room. Technical Specifications: · Power Supply: 9 V DC · Alarm Sound: 85dB (3m) · Operating Temperature: - 1 oC ~ 60 oC · Response Time: 7 sec. Catalogue number: 46DS407

G11

High power safety devices and isolating switches Bases for high power safety devices

114

www.elmarkgroup.eu Bases for high power safety devices Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60269-1

The series bases for high power safety device is manufactured of permitivity alloy with mounted contact jaws of electrolytic copper supplied with special springs for contact compression and easy fuse links taking out. All current leading parts are connected to inlet outlet terminals with bolts; the terminals also end with bolts, to which the power supply conductors are connected. The bases are offered in five type sizes corresponding to the five types of fuse links.

Overall dimensions (mm)

Base type

Ød

SIST00

100

120

7.5

SIST 0

150

170

7.5

SIST1

175

200

10.5

SIST2

200

225

100

10.5

SIST3

210

250

105

10.5

H1 Base type

Fuse link type

Rated current (А)

Rated voltage Un (V)

Weight (gr)

Catalogue number

SIST00

NТ 00

до 160

600

193

12001

SISP00

NT 00

до 160

600

215

12001Р

Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain

Base type

Fuse link type

Rated current (А)

Rated voltage Un (V)

Weight (gr)

Catalogue number

SIST0

NТ 0

до 160

600

295

12010

SISP0

NT 0

до 160

600

319

12010P

Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain

Base type

Fuse link type

Rated current (А)

Rated voltage Un (V)

Weight (gr)

Catalogue number

SIST1

NТ 1

до 250

600

550

12100

SISP1

NT 1

до 250

600

550

12100P

Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain

High power safety devices and isolating switches Fuse links for high power safety devices

115

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Base type

Fuse link type

Rated current (А)

Rated voltage Un (V)

Weight (gr.)

Catalogue number

SIST2

NТ 2

до 400

600

770

12200

SISP2

NT 2

до 400

600

810

12200Р

Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain

Base type

Fuse link type

Rated current (А)

Rated voltage Un (V)

Weight (gr.)

Catalogue number

SIST3

NТ 3

до 630

600

965

12300

SISP3

NT 3

до 630

600

987

12300P

Remark : Fuse bases SISP are made of porcelain

Fuse links for high power safety devices Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60269-1 EN 60269-2

The series fuse links for high power safety devices is designed for short circuit protection. They are distinguished with high speed of operation and high reliability. The element is a ceramic (porcelain) body filled with fine quartz sand for voltaic arc lowering. In the ceramic body is mounted a fusible, specially profiled wafer connecting the current leading terminals. These terminals are manufactured of copper alloy with special nickel coating and have the form of knives to provide more contact surface. The fuse links correspond to “gL – gG” class which means that they are with common function and normal response time. NH Fuses Two operating classes of NH Fuses are available: · Operating class gL/gG – general purpose, line protection, slow acting · Operating class “aM” – fast acting, suitable for motor overload and short circuit protection Technical data: * Rated voltage: 500V * Rated short circuit current: 120 kAeff * IP code: IP 00 * Ambient temperature: -5 to +55°C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Overall dimensions (mm)

Fuse link type

NT00

56.5

NT 0

125

56.5

NT1

135

NT 2

150

NT 3

150

84.5

High power safety devices and isolating switches Fuse links for high power safety devices

116

www.elmarkgroup.eu Type

NT00

In (A)

Un (V) Cat.№ class gL-gG Cat.№ class aM

NT00

100

125

160

500,600

500, 600

10004

10005

10006

10008

10009

10012

10016

10004R

10005R

10006R

10008R

10009R

10012R

10016R

500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 10001

10002

10003

10001R 10002R 10003R

NT 0

100

125

160

500,600

500, 600

10050

10063

10080

10090

10092

10096

10032R 10040R 10050R

10063R

10080R

10090R

10092R

10096R

Type

NT 1

In (A)

100

125

160

200

225

250

500,600

500, 600

10110

10112

10116

10120

10122

10125

10108R 10110R

10112R

10116R

10120R

10122R

10125R

NT 2

160

200

250

315

400

Type

NT 0

In (A)

Un (V) Cat.№ class gL-gG Cat.№ class aM

NT00

Un (V) Cat.№ class gL-gG Cat.№ class aM

Type In (A)

500,600 500,600 500,600 500,600 10015

10025

10015R 10025R

10032

10040

500,600 500,600 10108

Un (V)

500,600

500, 600

Cat.№ class gL-gG

10216

10220

10225

10231

10240

Cat.№ class aM

10216R

10220R

10225R

10231R

10240R

NT 3

500

630

Type In (A)

Un (V)

500,600

Cat.№ class gL-gG

10350

10363

Cat.№ class aM

10350R

10363R

High power safety devices and isolating switches Isolating switches Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-1; EN 60947-3

117

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Designed in two types – horizontal and vertical. They represent a combination of low voltage isolating switch and high power safety devices mounted in a common plastic corpus. They are used for low voltage distribution boards and complete transformer substations (CTS) where visible circuit distribution is necessary. They provide safety and convenience at fuse links change. The plastic corpus increases the IP code and the plastic lid provides simultaneous circuits switching on/off. The lid allows easy removing which is additional measure at repairs. The vertical isolating switches are mounted directly to the power supply rails which enables the exploitation and improves the safety of the staff. Technical data: * Rated voltage: 500V * Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted fuse links * Number of poles: 3 * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV * Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles * IP code: IP 40 * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * Ambient temperature: -5 to +55°C * Altitude: up to 2000m

Overall dimensions (mm)

Isolating switch type

THB -160

105

160

100

THB - 250

185

220

111

180

THB - 400

210

260

130

205

THB - 630

256

270

140

94.5

245

THB - horizontal

HG2B - vertical

Type

THB

In (A)

160

250

400

630

Un(V)

500, 660

Fuse link size

NT00

NT1

NT2

NT3

Cat. №

44801

44802

44803

44804

Type

HG2B

In (A)

160

250

400

630

Un(V)

500, 660

Fuse link size

NT00

NT1

NT2

NT3

Cat. №

44805

44806

44807

44808

High power safety devices and isolating switches Switch disconnector

118

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The series of switch disconnectors EL-D02 are developed for short-circuit protection. They have a high speed of start and high reliability. They have a plastic body of inflammable plastics adapted for mounting on a DIN rail, where a porcelain round plug, which is filled with fine quartz sand for extinguishing the electric arc. In this ceramic body is mounted melting, specifically profiled plate, which connects the input power terminals. These terminals are produced from copper alloy with especially laid nickel layer and contact with the projecting bolts from the plastic body. There is a plastic locking system for the insertion for safety at substitution of burnt insertions. There are offered two types of insertions according to the degree of quick operation: normally quickly operating ones – class “gG” and over quickly operating ones class “aR”

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60947-3 VDE 0638

Technical characteristics: * Rated voltage: 600V * Insulation voltage: >2500V * Rated current on short-circuit: 120 кА * Direct mounting to the load * Two insulated points to the load * Protection rate: IP 44 * Cross-section of the supply conductors: up to 35mm2 * Environmental temperature: -5° до +55°С * Altitude: up to 2000m

Type

Number of poles

Rated current (А)

Type of the fuse

Catalogue number

Box / Carton

EL - D02-32 1P EL - D02-32 2P EL - D02-32 3P EL - D02-32 4P EL - D02-63 1P EL - D02-63 1P+N EL - D02-63 2P EL - D02-63 3P EL - D02-63 3P+N EL - D02-63 4P

1P 2P 3P 4P 1P 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 4P

32 32 32 32 63 63 63 63 63 63

RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/63 RO 26/63 RO 26/63 RO 26/63 RO 26/63 RO 26/63

10D0231 10D0232 10D0233 10D0234 10D0261 10D0262 10D0265 10D0263 10D0264 10D0266

6 / 180 3 / 180 2 / 180 1 / 180 6 / 90 3 / 90 3 / 90 2 / 90 1 / 120 1 / 120

Type of the fuse class gG

Voltage (V)

Rated current (А)

Size of the fuse Ød x h

Catalogue number

RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/32 RO 26/63 RO 26/63 RO 26/63

500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500

2 4 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Ø11x 36mm Ø11x 36mm Ø11x 36mm Ø11x 36mm Ø11x 36mm Ø15x 36mm Ø15x 36mm Ø15x 36mm Ø15x 36mm Ø15x 36mm Ø15x 36mm

10R0232 10R0234 10R0236 10R0240 10R0246 10R0248 10R0245 10R0243 10R0640 10R0650 10R0660

Industrial plugs and sockets Industrial plugs

119

www.elmarkgroup.eu Industrial plugs and sockets Ht/HTN type

They are specially developed plugs and contacts designed for mounting in industrial buildings or outdoors. Made of special high quality plastic with impurity against aging at sun light exposing and for increasing the mechanical strength. They are designed in accordance with standard IEC 309-1 and provide reliable connection and high protection rate of the staff from electrical current. They provide IP protection not less than IP 44/67. They are designed in types for indoors and outdoors mounting, and with movable or static plugs and sockets.

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60309-1; EN 60309-2

Technical data: * Rated voltage: 500V * Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted protection in the boards * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV * Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles * IP code: IP 44/67 * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * Ambient temperature: -5 to +55째C * Altitude: up to 2000m * Plugs and sockets: 6h

Model Order type number

In (A)

HT-013

HT-023

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

1P+N+E

230

121 / 84 / 53

37013

10 / 100

1P+N+E

230

138 / 92 / 63

37023

10 / 100

Poles

Package /Box

I1 Model Order type number

In (A)

HT-014

HT-024 HT-034

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

3P+E

400

121 / 84 / 51

37014

10 / 100

3P+E

400

138 / 92 / 63

37024

10 / 60

3P+E

400

230 / 109 / 36

37034

1 / 10

400

295 / 124 / 50

37044

1 / 10

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Poles

3P+E

Package /Box

HT-044

125

Model Order type number

In (A)

HT-015

3P+N+E

400

129 / 92 / 62

37015

10 / 100

HT-025

3P+N+E

400

149 / 97 / 70

37025

10 / 60

HT-035

3P+N+E

400

230 / 109 / 36

37035

1 / 10

HT-045

125

3P+N+E

400

295 / 124 / 50

37045

1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

HTN 0131

1P+N+E

230

120/71/12

37131

1 / 40

HTN 0231

1P+N+E

230

150/93/17

37231

1 / 40

Poles

Package /Box

Industrial plugs and sockets Static industrial plugs

120

www.elmarkgroup.eu Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

3P+E

400

125/79/12

37141

10 / 60

3P+E

400

150/93/17

37241

10 / 40

3P+E

400

230/109/36

37341

1 / 10

HTN 0441

125

3P+E

400

230/109/36

37441

1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HTN 0151

3P+N+E

400

133/87/12

37151

10 / 60

HTN 0251

3P+N+E

400

155/99.5/17

37251

10 / 40

HTN 0351

3P+N+E

400

230/109/36

37351

1 / 10

HTN 0451

125

3P+N+E

400

295/124/50

37451

1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HT-513

1P+N+E

230

121/79

37513

10 / 60

HT-523

1P+N+E

230

131/83

37523

10 / 40

Model Order type number

In (A)

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HT 514

3P+E

400

121/76

37514

10 / 60

HT 524

3P+E

400

131/83

37524

10 / 40

HT 534

3P+E

400

131/83

37534

10 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b /c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HT 515

3P+N+E

400

123/79

37515

10 / 60

HT 525

3P+N+E

400

132/84

37525

10 / 40

HT 535

3P+N+E

400

132/84

37535

1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

HTN 0141

HTN 0241 HTN 0341

Poles

Static industrial plugs

Poles

Industrial plugs and sockets

121

Static industrial contacts for exposed wiring

www.elmarkgroup.eu

20 Ă&#x2020;

34 5

32.5

Pg21

58 70.5

Model Order type number

In (A)

HT-113

HT-123

Model Order type number

In (A)

HT-114

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

1P+N+E

230

126 / 86

37113

1 / 60

1P+N+E

230

141 / 97

37123

1 / 60

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

3P+E

400

132 / 91

37114

10 / 60

Poles

Package/Box

HT-124

3P+E

400

141 / 96

37124

10 / 60

HT-134

3P+E

400

193 / 122

37134

1 / 10

HT-144

125

3P+E

400

220 / 140

37144

1 / 10

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

3P+N+E

400

129 / 96

3P+N+E

400

141 / 98

3P+N+E

400

125

3P+N+E

400

Model Order type number

In (A)

HT-115

HT-125

HT-135 HT-145

Model Order type number

In (A)

HTN 1131

HTN 1231

Poles

Catalogue number

Package/Box

37115

10 / 60

37125

10 / 60

193 / 122

37135

1 / 10

220 / 140

37145

1 / 10

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b/c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

1P+N+E

230

101/150/93.5

37731

10 / 40

1P+N+E

230

114/162/93.5

37631

10 / 40

Poles

Industrial plugs and sockets Movable industrial contacts for exposed wiring

122

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b/c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

3P+E

400

104/150/93.5

37741

10 / 60

3P+E

400

116/162/93.5

37641

10 / 40

3P+E

400

171/170/230

37842

1 / 10

HTN 1441

125

3P+E

400

171/170/230

37844

1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b/c

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

Model Order type number

In (A)

HTN 1141

HTN 1241 HTN 1341

Poles

HTN 1151

3P+N+E

400

107/150/93.5

37751

10 / 60

HTN 1251

3P+N+E

400

116/162/93.5

37651

10 / 40

HTN 1351

3P+N+E

400

171/170/230

37852

1 / 10

HTN 1451

125

3P+N+E

400

171/170/230

37854

1 / 10

Movable industrial contacts for exposed wiring

H4 Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

230

130 / 96

37213

10 / 100

230

149 / 90

37223

10 / 60

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

3P+E

400

131 / 96

37214

10 / 100

3P+E

400

149 / 90

37224

10 / 60

HT-234

3P+E

400

230/109

37234

1 / 10

HT-244

125

3P+E

400

290/124

37244

1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

HT-215

3P+N+E

400

139 / 90

37215

10 / 60

HT-225

3P+N+E

400

154 / 100

37225

10 / 60

HT-235

3P+N+E

400

230/100

37235

1 / 10

HT-245

125

3P+N+E

400

290/124

37245

1 / 10

Model Order type number

In (A)

HT-213

1P+N+E

HT-223

1P+N+E

Model Order type number

In (A)

HT-214

HT-224

Poles

Un (V)

Industrial plugs and sockets

123

Industrial built in contacts

www.elmarkgroup.eu Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

1P+N+E

230

131/90

37831

1 / 60

1P+N+E

230

149/90

37931

1 / 60

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

131/76

37841

10 / 60

149/90

37941

10 / 40

400

271/115

37942

1 / 10

400

295/137

37943

1 / 10

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

139/90

37851

10 / 60

400

154/100

37951

10 / 40

400

240/112

37952

1 / 10

400

300/126

37953

1/6

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Model Order type number

In (A)

HTN 2131

HTN 2231

Model Order type number

In (A)

HTN 2141

3P+E

400

HTN 2241

3P+E

400

HTN 2341

3P+E

HTN 2441

125

3P+E

Model Order type number

In (A)

HTN 2151

3P+N+E

400

HTN 2251

3P+N+E

HTN 2351

3P+N+E

HTN 2451

125

3P+N+E

Poles

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Package/Box

Industrial built in contacts Model Order type number

In (A)

HT-413

HT-423

Model Order type number

In (A)

HT-414

HT-424

Poles

1P+N+E

Poles

3P+E

Package/Box

230

70/85

37413

10 / 100

230

80/97

37423

10 / 60

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Un (V)

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Package/Box

400

70/85

37414

10 / 100

400

80/97

37424

10 / 60

Industrial plugs and sockets Distribution boxes with industrial contacts

124

www.elmarkgroup.eu Model Order type number

In (A)

HT-415

HT-425

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

тип шуко

230

Model Order type number

In (A)

Poles

Un (V)

213L-2P-W

230

HT-105SR

Un (V)

Poles

3P+N+E

1P+N+E

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

400

70/85

37415

10 / 60

400

80/97

37425

10 / 60

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

37105

20 / 200

Dimensions (mm) a /b

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

Package/Box

450

37003

1 / 42

Dimensions (mm) a /b

70/70

Distribution boxes with mounted industrial plugs and sockets and protection devices They are specially designed distribution boxes with mounted industrial plugs and sockets fabric cabled with possibility for protection devices mounting (breakers, residual current devices). They are designed for building sites mounting, industrial projects for power supply of mobile – movable consumers, exhibition centers, outdoor concerts or repair- reconstruct operations with temporary character. The boxes are made of special high quality plastic with impurity against aging at sun light exposing and for increasing the mechanical strength. They are designed in accordance with standard EN 60529 and provide reliable connection and high protection rate of the staff from electrical current. They provide IP protection not less than IP 44/67.

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60309-1; EN 60309-2; EN 60 529

Technical data: * Rated voltage: 400V * Rated short circuit current: according to the mounted safety fuses and residual current devices * Impulse voltage wear resistance: 8kV * Power supply cable: 5x2.5mm2 * Mechanical wear resistance: 3000 cycles Inlet power supply Type Outlets * IP code: IP 44 conductor(mm2) * Plastic: UV rays wear resistance * Ambient temperature: -5 to +55°C 3 contacts 16A 3х2.5 EDB 100 - 401 * Altitude: up to 2000m 1P+N+E * Overall dimensions of the box: 136x94x425 mm

Catalogue number

53401

EDB 100 - 402

5х2.5

1 contact 16A 3P+N+E и 2 contacts 16A 1P+N+E

53402

EDB 200 - 401

3х2.5

3 contacts 32A 1P+N+E

53421

EDB 100 - 501*

3x2.5

3 contacts 16A 1P+N+E

53501*

Note: * The distribution box is supplied with extension cable with section 3x2.5mm2 and length 1.5m

112

Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards Plastic distribution boards

125

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Plastic distribution boards for exposed wiring The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical current circuit circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90°. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature with IP code IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from direct contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62 208; EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3

Technical data: * Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz * wear resistance to heat: UL 94 * IP code: IP 40 * Class of current limiting: 2

Number of rows

Module capacity (number of devices)

Terminal strips number

Openings number

1 1 1 1 1 2 3

4 6 8 12 18 24 36

2 2 2 3 4 6 8

9 9 14 17 25 34 43

110 150 190 260 365 270 310

Dimensions (mm) W H

205 205 205 205 220 330 475

75 75 75 75 75 75 85

Catalogue number

60040 60060 60080 60120 60180 60240 60360

Package / Box

1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 10 1 / 10 1 / 10 1/5

Plastic distribution boards for buried wiring The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical current circuit circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90°. They are made of white self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature with IP code IP 40. The mounted device in the box is protected from indirect contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted through building-in in openings on the wall under plaster or in hollow-wall (through special clasps). Technical data: * Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz * wear resistance to heat: UL 94 * IP code: IP 40 * Class of current limiting: 2

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62 208; EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3

Number of rows

Module capacity (number of devices)

Клеморед брой

Openings number

1 1 1 1 1 2 3

4 6 8 12 18 24 36

2 2 2 3 4 6 8

9 9 14 17 25 34 43

110 150 190 260 365 270 310

Dimensions (mm) W H

205 205 205 205 220 330 475

75 75 75 75 75 75 85

Catalogue number

60041 60061 60081 60121 60181 60241 60361

Package / Box

1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 10 1 / 10 1 / 10 1/5

Note: At building-in in hollow-wall it is supplied with clasps for hollow-wall – 4pcs with catalogue number 60085. There are 10 sets of clasps in a package.

catalogue number 60085

Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards Metal distribution boards

126

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Moisture-proof distribution boards for exposed wiring The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a module box with mounted protective devices of the given flats electrical installation current circles. They are supplied with transparent door for each row opening upwards to 90Ů&#x2019;. They are made of white non-self-extinguishing plastic, resistant to heat and high temperature. The special design of the lids and gaskets provides IP code IP 55. The mounted device in the box is protected from indirect contact to the current leading parts. They are offered with DIN-rail for device mounting and terminal strips for the neutral and earthing conductor joining. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62 209; EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3

Technical data: * Maximum insulation voltage: 690V; 50Hz * wear resistance to heat: UL 94 * IP code: IP 55 * Class of current limiting: 2

Type

WP4 WP6 WP8 WP12 WP18 WP24

Number of rows

1 1 1 1 1 2

Module capacity (number of devices)

Terminal strips number

Openings number

4 6 8 12 18 24

2 2 2 3 4 6

9 9 14 17 25 34

214 214 214 270 378 340

Dimensions (mm) W H

127 162 216 214 233 288

Catalogue number

93 93 93 93 93 93

Package / Box

60100 60101 60102 60103 60104 60105

1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 20 1 / 10 1 / 10 1/5

Stainless metal cabinets for distribution boards The distribution boards are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a metal cabinet with different dimensions. They are supplied with a special lock, plate for fixing the device, lid for the input-output conductors, earthing stud, gaskets, etc. The door of the box can change its opening direction. They are manufactured of whole stainless sheet steel processed with anti-corrosion and decorative coating powder style laid. They are used for low voltage distribution boards in food, wine and tobacco industries and at special requirements regarding the corrosion wear resistance in industrial projects. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62 208; EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3

Technical data: * Rated voltage: up to 1000V * Maximum current: up to 800A * Material: stainless steel * IP code: IP 65 Mounting: * vertically to a flat surface

Metal board Type

Thickness of sheet metal (mm)

dimensions (mm) L (height)

W (width)

Catalogue number

H (depth)

SXF 25/25/15

1.0

250

150

54025

SXF 30/25/15

1.0

300

250

150

54030

SXF 40/30/20

1.0

400

300

200

54040

SXF 50/40/20

1.2

500

400

200

54050

SXF 60/40/20

1.2

600

400

200

54060

SXF 70/50/20

1.2

700

500

200

54070

SXF 80/60/25

1.5

800

600

250

54080

SXF 100/80/30

1.5

1000

800

300

54100

SXF 120/80/30

1.5

1200

800

300

54120

112

Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards Metal distribution boards

127

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Metal cabinets for distribution boards The metal cabinets are designed for mounting in newly built buildings or buildings in reconstruction. They are a metal box with different dimensions. They are supplied with a special lock, plate for fixing the device, lid for the input-output conductors, earthing stud, gaskets, etc. The door of the box can change its opening direction. They are manufactured of whole sheet metal processed with anti-corrosion and decorative coating powder style laid. They are used for low voltage distribution boards in housing buildings, offices, shops and industrial projects. Mounted directly on the walls with screws.

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 62208; EN 60439-1;EN 60 439-3

Technical data: * Rated voltage: up to 1000V * Maximum current: up to 1250A * Material: steel * Coating: powder style painting * IP code: IP 65 Mounting: * vertically to a flat surface

Type

Thickness of the steel metal (mm)

Metal board dimensions (mm) L (height) W (widht) H (depth)

Nominal working current In (A)

Catalogue number

JXF 25/25/15

1.0

250

150

53025

JXF 25/30/15

1.0

250

300

150

100

53026

JXF 30/25/15

1.0

300

250

150

100

53030

JXF 30/40/20

1.0

300

400

200

160

53031

JXF 40/30/20

1.0

400

300

200

160

53040

JXF 40/50/20

1.2

400

500

200

250

53041

JXF 50/40/20

1.2

500

400

200

250

53050

JXF 40/60/20

1.2

400

600

200

250

53051

JXF 60/40/20

1.2

600

400

200

250

53060

JXF 70/50/20

1.2

700

500

200

350

53070

JXF 80/60/25

1.5

800

600

250

400

53080

JXF 100/80/30

1.5

1000

800

300

630

53100

JXF 120/80/30

1.5

1200

800

300

630

53120

JXF 140/80/30

1.5

1400

800

300

800

53140

JXF 180/80/30

1.5

1800

800

300

1000

53188

JXF 180/100/30*

1.5

1800

1000

300

1250

53180

Note: *Metal board with double door

Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards Metal distribution boards

128

www.elmarkgroup.eu Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60439-1; EN 60 439-3

Electric Switchboards and Panels with Type-Approval Certificates The company has produced and successfully passed the type-approval procedures for the following metal and plastic case electric boxes, switchboards and gear: -Tower Mounted Switchgear - Low Voltage Meter Box - Low Voltage Main Switchboard - Distribution Switchboard - Power Compensation System

Low Voltage Meter Box Type TEPO

Low Voltage Main Switchboard Type GRT

Tower Mounted Switchgear Type MTT

Power Compensation System Type CCU

Distribution Switchboard Type KRSH

Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards Module plastic distribution boards

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60439 -1 EN 60439 -5

DZ xxxxxxxxE*

Bottom

129

www.elmarkgroup.eu Modular plastic distribution switchboards Plastic distribution boards of various sizes. Intended for extension or distribution of cable lines during electrical works. They can also be used as meter boxes. Switchboards are made of polycarbonate or thermostatic fiber glass. They are resistant to chemical attacks, thermal and UV radiation. Separate modules can be interconnected to form power switchboards of different sizes. Boards are mounted on the wall surface by use of screws. Technical Specifications: ·Resistance: chemical agents, weak acids, alkali, oils, salts, etc. ·Rated Voltage: up to 690V ·Maximum Current: up to 800A ·Dielectric Strength: 1012 (Ωm) ·Flammability: 960°C ·Thermal Deformation: over 240°C ·Operating Temperature: -35°C + 40°C ·Material: SMC ·Fire Resistance Class: Fv 0 ·IP Code: IP44 ·Recyclable Mounting: * Vertically, on a flat surface or column. NOTE: Boxes are supplied with the respective fixtures depending on the method of installation (bottom or column). Board Type

Material Type

L (mm)

H (mm)

W (mm)

Catalogue №

ZH 24664001 ZH 32664001 ZH 24666001 ZH 32666001 ZH 24668001 ZH 32668001 ZH 2466A002 ZH 3266A002 ZH 2466A202 ZH 3266A202

SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC

400 400 600 600 800 800 1000 1000 1200 1200

660 660 660 660 660 660 660 660 660 660

240 320 240 320 240 320 240 320 240 320

53Z201 53Z301 53Z202 53Z302 53Z203 53Z303 53Z204 53Z304 53Z205 53Z305

Board Type

Material Type

L (mm)

H (mm)

W (mm)

Catalogue №

ZH 24896001 ZH 32896001 ZH 24898001 ZH 32898001 ZH 2489A002 ZH 3289A002 ZH 2489A202 ZH 3289A202

SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC

600 600 800 800 1000 1000 1200 1200

890 890 890 890 890 890 890 890

240 320 240 320 240 320 240 320

53Z206 53Z306 53Z207 53Z307 53Z208 53Z308 53Z209 53Z309

Board Type

Material Type

L (mm)

H (mm)

W (mm)

Catalogue №

ZH 241256001 ZH 321256001 ZH 241258001 ZH 321258001 ZH 24125A002 ZH 32125A002 ZH 24125A202 ZH 32125A202

SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC

600 600 800 800 1000 1000 1200 1200

1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250

240 320 240 320 240 320 240 320

53Z211 53Z311 53Z212 53Z312 53Z213 53Z313 53Z214 53Z314

Board Type

Material Type

L (mm)

H (mm)

W (mm)

Catalogue №

600 600 600 600 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000 1200 1200 1200 1200

500 750 500 750 500 750 500 750 500 500 750 750 500 500 750 750

320 320 240 240 320 320 240 320 240 320 240 320 240 320 240 320

53DZ216 53DZ217 53DZ316 53DZ317 53DZ218 53DZ219 53DZ318 53DZ319 53DZ220 53DZ320 53DZ221 53DZ321 53DZ222 53DZ322 53DZ223 53DZ323

DZ 24506001 SMC DZ 24756001E* SMC DZ 32506001 SMC DZ 32756001E* SMC DZ 24508001 SMC DZ 24758001E* SMC DZ 32508001 SMC DZ 32758001E* SMC DZ 2450A001 SMC DZ 3250A001 SMC DZ 2475A001E* SMC DZ 3275A001E* SMC DZ 2450A201 SMC DZ 3250A201 SMC DZ 2475A201E* SMC DZ 3275A201E SMC DZ xxxxxxxxE* Column mounting Board Type

Material Type

L (mm)

W(mm)

Catalogue №

SZH 040024 SZH 060024 SZH 080024 SZH 100024 SZH 120024 SZH 060032

SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC

400 600 800 1000 1200 600

240 240 240 240 240 320

53SZ211 53SZ212 53SZ213 53SZ214 53SZ215 53SZ312

Boxes and cable cabinets for electric panels

130

Cable support systems

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The universal cable support systems are used for construction of cable link in closed production premises for direct mounting on even vertical surfaces. They are perforated metal grates and accessories with standard lengths and sizes, which are assembled on the basis of a “click” system. They allow quick construction of cable systems with many angles and derivations. The offered choice is from tin with thickness up to 1.0 mm. and standard length of 3 m. Type Symbol

Type

Channel perforated Channel perforated Channel perforated Channel perforated Channel perforated

Cable Tray width/height/ sheet thickness (mm)

Cable Tray Length (m)

Cable Tray Weight (kg)

60 60 60 60 60

3 3 3 3 3

3.40 4.40 5.30 9.20 12.0

Cable Tray Length (m)

Weight kg

Catalogue number

1.00 1.30 1.95 3.15 5.05

56ТS05030 56TS10060 56TS20060 56TS30060 56TS40060

Cable Tray Length (m)

Weight kg

Catalogue number

0.55 0.78 1.64 2.51 3.95

56KS05030 56KS10060 56KS20060 56KS30060 56KS40060

Cable Tray width/height/ sheet thickness (mm)

Lid Length (m)

Weight kg

Catalogue number

10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

2 2 2 2 2 -

1.16 1.16 1.96 3.62 4.70 0.39 0.59 1.33 1.86 0.41 0.82 1.67 2.38

50 100 200 300 400

PK -50/30* РК - 100/60 PK - 200/60 PK - 300/60 PK - 400/60

0.55 0.75 0.75 0.90 0.90

Cable Maximum Number of 4х2.5 Weight Cables per Tray (kg/m)

4.6 10.8 21.6 43.2 54.0

12 24 43 65 86

Catalogue number

56PK5030 56РК10060 56PK20060 56PK30060 56PK40060

Note: PK50/30 is a punched tray, not a click system Type

Type Symbol

Т-derivation Т-derivation Т-derivation Т-derivation Т-derivation

TS - 50/30 TS - 100/60 TS - 200/60 TS - 300/60 TS - 400/60

Type

Type Symbol

Angle Angle Angle Angle Angle

Cable Tray width/height/ sheet thickness (mm)

50 100 200 300 400

Type Symbol

Upright lid Upright lid Upright lid Upright lid Upright lid Angle lid Angle lid Angle lid Angle lid Т-lid Т-lid Т-lid Т-lid

PPK - 50 РРK - 100 PPK - 200 PPK - 300 PPK - 400 PKS - 100 PKS - 200 PKS - 300 PKS - 400 PTS - 100 PTS - 200 PTS - 300 PTS - 400

0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

Cable Tray width/height/ sheet thickness (mm)

50 100 200 300 400

KS -50/30 KS - 100/60 KS - 200/60 KS - 300/60 KS - 400/60

Type

60 60 60 60 60

50 100 200 300 400 100 200 300 400 100 200 300 400

60 60 60 60 60

0.55 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

0.55 0.55 0.55 0.7 0.7 0.55 0.55 0.7 0.7 0.55 0.55 0.7 0.7

Type Load

kg/m 450

56PPK0530 56PPK10060 56PPK20060 56PPK30060 56PPK40060 56PKS10060 56PKS20060 56PKS30060 56PKS40060 56PTS10060 56PTS20060 56PTS30060 56PTS40060 Type Symbol

Needed pcs. for 3 m

Catalogue number

2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1set

56KLS6000 56RS50 56NSC100 56NSC200 56NSC300 56NSC400 56NLK 50 56NLK 100 56NLK 200 56NLK 300 56NLK 400 56VE0300 56RE2010 56RE3010 56RE3020 56RE4010 56RE4020

400 350 300 250 225 200

150 canal 300/60 & 400/60 canal 100/60 & 200/60

100 90 80 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 1.0

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9 2.0

Distance between carriers

Universal click Binding member Ceiling carrier Ceiling carrier Ceiling carrier Ceiling carrier Wall carrier Wall carrier Wall carrier Wall carrier Wall carrier Bolt set Reduction 200/100 Reduction 300/100 Reduction 300/200 Reduction 400/100 Reduction 400/200

KLS 60 RS 50 NSC100 NSC200 NSC300 NSC400 NLK 50 NLK 100 NLK 200 NLK 300 NLK 400 VE -03

Plastic boxes and metal cabinets for distribution boards Moisture-proof junction boxes

131

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Moisture-proof junction boxes Plastic junction boxes with different shapes and dimensions. Designed for cable lines extension or tapping at cable installations laying. Manufactured of ABS material with openings for inlet-outlet conductors, firmed with rubber stoppers to provide the corresponding IP code. Chemical, thermal and UV rays wear resistance. Mounted directly on the walls with screws. Documentation corresponding to the product: Standard: EN 60670-1 IP44

Technical data: * Rated voltage: up to 1000V * Material: ABS * IP code: IP 44/66 Mounting: * vertically to a flat surface

IP44

Ingress protection rating IP

Catalogue number

8070

8071

22.5

18.5

8072

100 100 70

8073

150 110 70

8076

150 150 70

8074

200 100 70

8075

WB200/155/80

200 155 80

8077

WB255/200/80

255 200 80

8078

WB300/250/120

300 250 120

8079

WB400/350/120

400 350 120

8080

Box type

IP54

Box dimensions (mm)

Gaskets dimensions (mm)

WB50/50

22.5

WB80/50

22.5

WB85/85/50

WB100/100/70

WB150/110/70

WB150/150/70 WB200/100/70

Uninterruptible power supply and generators

132

Uninterruptible power supply systems UPS

www.elmarkgroup.eu

The UPS power supply systems are developed for provision of uninterruptible power supply to computer rooms, financial and communication centers, medical equipment, schools, or consumers with special requirement to power supply parameters. UPS power supplies are available in various combinations for different input/output voltages, low or high output frequency, and different output signal curves. They have microprocessor parameter control and LCD display. The UPS are supplied with maintenance-free rechargeable batteries, the charging level of which is controlled by the microprocessor monitoring system. UPS power supply systems are suitable for installation in different premises. They have a “Cold Start” function and high protection level. The can provide power supply for a different period of time depending on the model. Technical Specifications: ·Input Voltage: 230/400 V AC ·Output Voltage: 230/400 V AC ·Overload Capacity: 125% for 60 sec. ·Transfer Time: O ms ·Output Frequency: 50 Hz ·Power Capacity: see the tables below ·Display: LCD ·Communication Interface: RS485/232 communication port or relay contactor ·Battery Power Indicator ·Input/Output Voltage Indicator ·Sine Wave Output: THD ≤ 3%

Battery

Number

Catalogue number

7Аh / 12V 24Аh / 12V 38Аh / 12V 65Аh / 12V 100 Аh / 12V

1 1 1 1 1

46UPS7B 46UPS24B 46UPS38B 46UPS65B 46UPS100B

Low Frequency Inverters with sigle-phase output – for medical and telecommunications equipment, etc. Type

Input Voltage (V AC)

Output Voltage (V AC)

Battery Voltage (V CD)

Capacity (KVA)

Number of Battery

Battery

FR - UK 60 FR - UK 80L FR - UK 1110 FR - UK 3115 FR - UK 3120T FR - UK 3130T FR - UK 3140T

230 230 230 400 400 400 400

230 230 230 230 230 230 230

192 192 192 192 348 348 348

6 8 10 15 20 30 40

16 16 16 16 29 29 29

7Аh / 12V no no no no no no

Overall Size (W/L/H) (mm)

230 / 635 / 690 230 / 635 / 690 300 / 740 / 700 300 / 740 / 700 400 / 800 / 1180 400 / 800 / 1180 400 / 800 / 1180

Weight (kg)

61 80 92 135 203 225 273

Catalogue number

46UPS206 46UPS208 46UPS210 46UPS415 46UPS420 46UPS430 46UPS440

Low Frequency Inverters with three-phase output

Type

Input Voltage (V AC)

Output Voltage (V AC)

Battery Voltage (V CD)

Capacity (KVA)

Number of Battery

Battery

FR - UK 3320 FR - UK 3330 FR - UK 3340 FR - UK 3350

400 400 400 400

400±1% 400±1% 400±1% 400±1%

348 348 348 348

20 30 40 50

29 29 29 29

no no no no

Overall Size (W/L/H) (mm)

500 / 800 / 1180 500 / 800 / 1180 500 / 800 / 1180 500 / 800 / 1180

Weight (kg)

Catalogue number

236 296 300 355

46UPS442 46UPS443 46UPS444 46UPS445

High Frequency Inverters – for computer rooms, bank servers, etc.

Type

KR - 6000 KR - 1110S KR - 3110 KR - 3115 KR - 3120 KR - 3320L KR - 3330L

Input Voltage (V AC)

Output Voltage (V AC)

Battery Voltage (V CD)

Capacity (KVA)

Number of Battery

Battery

Overall Size (W/L/H) (mm)

Weight (kg)

Catalogue number

230 230 400 400 400 400 400

230±2% 230±2% 230±2% 230±2% 230±2% 400±1% 400±1%

120 240 240 240 240 348 348

6 10 10 15 20 20 30

20 20 20 20 20 20 20

7Аh / 12V 7Аh / 12V no no no no no

253 / 637 / 700 253 / 637 / 500 253 / 637 / 700 253 / 637 / 700 253 / 637 / 700 400 / 800 / 1180 400 / 800 / 1180

95 100 35 52 55 120 150

46UPS406 46UPS410 46UPS411 46UPS415 46UPS420 46UPS412 46UPS413

Computer Inverters – for computer rooms, bank servers, etc. Type

UPS 500 UPS 700 UPS 1000 UPS 1600 UPS 2000

Input Voltage (V AC)

Output Voltage (V AC)

Battery Voltage (V CD)

Capacity (KVA)

Number of Battery

Battery

Overall Size (W/L/H) (mm)

Weight (kg)

Catalogue number

230 230 230 230 230

230±10% 230±10% 230±10% 230±10% 230±10%

90 90 140 140 140

500 700 1000 1600 2000

1 1 2 3 3

7Аh / 12V 7Аh / 12V 7Аh / 12V 7Аh / 12V 7Аh / 12V

90 / 325 / 165 90 / 325 / 165 120 / 380 / 210 156 / 450 / 215 156 / 450 / 215

5 5.5 11 20 23

46UPS500 46UPS700 46UPS800 46UPS900 46UPS909

Uninterruptible power supply and generators

133

Generators

www.elmarkgroup.eu Power Generators are particularly designed to provide electricity to consumers in case of main power supply shut off, or in desolated areas, or in places without existing power distribution networks. They are available in various combinations of input and output voltages, engine power outputs, fuel types and noise protection levels. Power generators are supplied with modern controller with a LCD display. Parameters setting are easy to enter through the touch buttons. Generators are supplied with input power supply monitoring system and automatically start at input voltage drop. They have built-in batteries to power the controller and aid the generator starting. Battery charging level is controlled by the microprocessor monitoring system. Power Generators can be easily placed indoor or outdoor and boast a high level of protection. Technical Specifications: * Control Method: Manual or Automatic * Output Voltage: 230/400 V AC; 50 Hz * Electrical starter * Noise Level: up to 51 dB * Emergency Stop Button * Stop at preliminary set overvoltage or undervoltage * Stop/Indication at current overload * Stop/Indication at frequency deviation * Indicator for engine oil level too low * Stop/Indication at coolant overheating * Stop/Indication at engine fuel level too low * Stop/Indication at engine speed too high/low * Battery Status Indicator * Input/Output Voltage Indicator * History of Faults NOTE: Price include chargable batteries.

Input Voltage (V AC)

Generated Power (kVA)

230 230 400 230 230 400

3.2 5 10.5 3.3 5.5 10.5

Input Voltage (V AC)

Generated Power (kVA)

KDE16SS KDE25SS KDE35SS KDE20SS3 KDE35SS3 KDE60SS3 KDE75SS3 KDE100SS3 KDE120SS3

230 230 230 400 400 400 400 400 400

14 20 33 18.5 31 54 66 85 100

Type

Input Voltage (V AC)

Generated Power (kVA)

400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400

100 130 150 188 200 250 325 375 410 462 500 570 630

Type

KDE3500E KDE6500E KDE12EA3 KGE4000X KGE6500E KGE12E3

Type

BF-V109 BF-V142 BF-V165 BF-V206 BF-V220 BF-V275 BF-V358 BF-V412 BF-V450 BF-V500 BF-V550 BF-V625 BF-V688

Fuel

Fuel Type Consumption (g/kWh)

diesel diesel diesel gasoline gasoline gasoline

276 275 385 374 374 370

Fuel

Fuel Type Consumption (g/kWh)

320 320 300 320 300 290 290 290 290

Overall Size (W/L/H) (mm)

air cooling 655 / 480 / 530 air cooling 720 / 492 / 655 water cooling 1030 / 600 / 650 air cooling 675 / 520 / 540 air cooling 855 / 510 / 540 air cooling 910 / 785 / 710

Cooling Type

Overall Size (W/L/H) (mm)

Cooling Type

Overall Size (W/L/H) (mm)

23.8 29.5 35.3 41.8 46.5 53.4 70.9 78.3 86.0 95.5 104.5 118.7 131.0

water cooling water cooling water cooling water cooling water cooling water cooling water cooling water cooling water cooling water cooling water cooling water cooling water cooling

2080/750/1450 2280/750/1450 2400/870/1450 2550/1050/1500 2550/1050/1500 2650/1120/1595 2950/1120/1595 3100/1100/1630 3100/1100/1630 3300/1160/2000 3300/1160/2000 3300/1160/2000 3400/1380/2050

Note: For BF serie - Engine: VOLVO, Alternator: Stamford

Continuous Work Time (h)

Catalogue number

11 6 7.5 20 12 5.5

46GD2030 46GD2060 46GD3010 46GB2030 46GB2060 46GB3010

Continuous Work Time (h)

Catalogue number

water cooling 1570 / 780 / 1050 12 water cooling 1900 / 950 / 1200 10.5 water cooling 2250 / 950 / 1300 7 water cooling 1570 / 780 / 1050 10 water cooling 1900 / 950 / 1200 9.5 water cooling 2250 / 950 / 1300 5.5 water cooling 2700 / 1140 / 1500 6 water cooling 2700 / 1150 / 1500 5 water cooling 2700 / 1160 / 1500 4

(l/h)

Fuel

Fuel Type Consumption

diesel diesel diesel diesel diesel diesel diesel diesel diesel diesel diesel diesel diesel

Cooling Type

Continuous Work Time (h)

46GD2014 46GD2025 46GD2035 46GD3020 46GD3035 46GD3060 46GD3075 46GD3100 46GD3120

Catalogue number

46V109 46V142 46V165 46V206 46V220 46V275 46V358 46V412 46V450 46V500 46V550 46V625 46V688

134

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Cat. № 5195510

Cat. № 519420

Cat. № 5193055

Instruments Manual meters Digital multimeter ЕМ5510 This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 ¾ . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 0.4 / 4 / 40 / 400 / 600 V * AC voltage : 4 / 40 / 400 / 600V * DC current: 400μ / 4000μ / 40m / 400m / 10A * AC current: 400μ / 4000μ / 40m / 400m / 10A * Resistance: 400 / 4K / 40K / 400K / 4M / 40MΩ * Capacitors: 4η / 40η / 400η / 4μ / 40μ / 100μF * Frequency: 10 / 100 / 1k / 10k / 100k / 200kHz * Loading cycles: from 0.1% to 99.9% * Temperature: -20° up to 1000°С * Humidity: 30% to 95% * Illumination: 4000 Lux / 40000 Lux * Noise level: 35 to 100dB * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 310 g (including battery) * Battery: 1x9V * Dimensions: 83 х 162 х 47mm

Digital multimeter ЕМ420C This is a digital device for measuring of humidity, illumination, temperature and all electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 16 mm. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V * AC voltage : 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V * DC current: 200μ / 2000μ / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A * AC current: 00μ / 2000μ / 20m / 200m / 2 / 10A * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20MΩ * Temperature: -20° up to 1000°С * Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 200 g (including battery) * battery: 3x1.5 V * dimensions: 75 х 158 х 35mm Digital multimeter ЕМ3055 This is a digital device for measuring of all electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 3 ½ . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. Technical features: * DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V * AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V * DC current: 2m / 20m / 200m / 10A * AC current: 200m / 10A * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200MΩ * Capacity: 2000p / 20η / 200η / 20μF * Temperature: 0° up to 1000°С * Battery test: 1.5 / 3 / 9 / 12 V * Transistor test: Vce≈3V , Ib≈10μF * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 495 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 97 х 200 х 48mm

Instruments Manual meters

135

www.elmarkgroup.eu Digital multimeter EM3058 This is a digital device for measuring of temperature and all electric values. It features manual range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3 ¾ . It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off.

Cat. № 5193058

Technical features: * DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 1000 V * AC voltage: 200 m / 2 / 20 / 200 / 750V * DC current: 20μ / 200 μ / 2m / 200m / 10A * AC current: 20μ / 200μ / 2m / 200m / 2 / 10A * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20M / 200MΩ * Capacitors: 2η / 20η / 200η / 2μ / 20μF * Frequency: 20kHz to 2000kHz * Loading cycles: 0.1% to 99.9% * Temperature: 0° up to 1000°С * Logical level: High > 2.0 V; Low < 0.8 V * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 495 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 97 х 200 х 47 mm

Digital multimeter ЕМ31 This is a digital device for measuring of electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in 4 digits with the size of 16 mm. It is of high accuracy of analoguedigital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off and low battery indication.

Cat. № 519031

Technical features: * DC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V * AC voltage: 240m/ 2400m / 24 / 240 / 600 V * DC current: 240μ / 2400μ / 24m / 240m / 10A * AC current: 240μ / 2400μ / 24m / 240m / 10A * Resistance: 240 / 2400 / 24K / 240K / 2400K / 24MΩ * Capacity: 25η to 252μF * Frequency: 50 / 500 / 5000 / 50k / 0.5 MHz * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 137 g (including battery) * battery: 2x1.5 V * dimensions: 70 х 126 х 28mm Digital multimeter / pen ЕМ3215 This is a digital device for measuring of electric values in the form of a pen. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display, data retain function, automatic reset, polarity selection, range overload indication. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off and low battery indication and a torch.

Cat. № 5193215

Technical features: * DC voltage: 200m/ 2 / 20 / 200 / 600 V * AC voltage: 2 / 20 / 200 / 600V * DC current: 20m to 200mA * AC current: 20m to 200mA * Resistance: 200 / 2K / 20K / 200K / 2M / 20MΩ * Logical level: High > 2.3V; Low < 0.8 V * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 182 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 57 х 230 х 30mm

136

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Cat. № 519202

Cat. № 519204

Cat. № 519266

Cat. № 519520

Instruments Manual meters Digital clamp meter EM202 This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display showing the measured value in digits with the size of 3½ mm. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 1000 V * AC voltage: 750V * AC current: 20 / 200 / 1000A * Resistance: 200 kΩ * Temperature: -40° up to 1400°С * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 400 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 99 х 250 х 43mm Digital clamp meter EM204 This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features automatic range adjustment, manual value selection. It has an LCD display, low battery indication, overload protection. It is of high accuracy of analogue-digital conversion, precision in measuring and resistance to electro-magnetic interferences. It has an automatic switch off. Technical features: * DC voltage: 1000 V * AC voltage: 750V * DC current: 200 / 1000A * AC current: 200 / 1000A * Resistance: 200 kΩ * Frequency: 2 kHz * Temperature: -40° up to 1400°С * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 400 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 99 х 250 х 43mm Digital clamp meter EM266 This is a digital clamp meter for measuring of electric values. It features manual range adjustment. It has an LCD display and retain function option, low battery indication and overload protection. Technical features: * DC voltage: 1000 V * AC voltage: 750V * AC current: 200 / 1000A * Resistance: 200 / 20 kΩ * Circuit control: yes * Diodes control: yes * Weight: 310 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 69 х 229 х 38mm

Infrared temperature meter EM520A This is a digital device for measuring of temperature.The temperature is measured with no contact. It has a laser counter for precision measuring, suitable large LCD display, battery low indication and overload protection. Technical features: * Temperature: -20° up to 320°С / -4° to 608 °F * Distance to point size: 6:1 * Precision: ±2° C or 2% in reading * battery: 1x9V * dimensions: 90 х 155 х 45mm

Instruments Manual meters

137

www.elmarkgroup.eu Phase meter Gk7 A device indicating phase availability in the system. No contact phase indicator featuring sound and light indication of phase availability. Technical features: * Voltage range: from 50 to 1000V * Frequency range: from 50 Hz to 500 Hz * dimensions: length – 62mm Cat. № 519GK7

Digital detector 4 in 1 series TS530 This is a device for detecting metals, voltage and live conductors, wooden struts, or piping sections. The device has a 2meter measuring tape. It features light and sound indication. When an object is located, the display light blinks and marks with increasing position. Once the exact position is located, a light point is marked on the wall through a button.

Cat. № 519530

Technical features: * 2-meter measuring tape * Pen: marking the located detail * Piping section: metal pipe up to 25mm * Wooden struts: 30x30mm * Live conductors detection: 50mm for 90 ~ 250V; 50/60Hz * Weight: 213 g (including battery) * battery: 1x9 V * dimensions: 73 x 180 x 32mm

Industrial repair kit ETK06A A finely packaged repair kit containing four elements in a metal briefcase, sealed with special plastic foam and struts for each instrument. The kit includes:

Cat. № 51906A

* Digital multimeter EM420 * Digital clamp-on ammeter EM465 * Phase meter GK7 * Infrared temperature meter EM520A

Instruments Hydraulic crimping instruments

138

www.elmarkgroup.eu Hydraulic crimping pliers HT - 300 type

Catalogue number: 59300

Functions: * Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Technical data: * Crimping head turning at 360° which facilitates the crimping of static conductors * Device for automatic following of the effort at crimping completion * Form of the crimping element: hexahedral * Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm 2 * Section of the crimping conductors: - AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm 2 - Cu conductors – from 16 to 240 mm 2 * Element pressing power: 60kN * Width of the element: 17mm * Weight of the instrument: 3.3 kg * Length: 460mm * Used hydraulic oil: Shell Tellus T15 * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder

Hydraulic crimping pliers KYQ-300B type

Catalogue number: 59302

Functions: * Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Technical data: * Device for automatic following of the effort at crimping completion * Form of the crimping element: hexahedral * Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm 2 * Section of the crimping conductors: - AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm 2 - Cu conductors – from 16 to 240 mm 2 * Element pressing power: 16T * Width of the element: 22mm * Weight of the instrument: 6.8 kg * Length: 500mm * Used hydraulic oil: #23 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 23) * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder

Hydraulic crimping pliers YQK-300 type

Catalogue number: 59301

Functions: * Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Technical data: * Form of the crimping element: hexahedral * Size of the crimping element: 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300 mm 2 * Section of the crimping conductors: - AI conductors - from 16 to 300 mm 2 - Cu conductors – from 16 to 240 mm 2 * Element pressing power: 16T * Width of the element: 22mm * Weight of the instrument: 6.3 kg * Length: 500mm * Used hydraulic oil: Shell Tellus T15 * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder

Instruments Hydraulic piercing instruments

139

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Hydraulic crimping pliers YQK – 70 type

Catalogue number: 59303

Functions: * Crimping of aluminum or copper conductors with cable terminals or bush in the corresponding size Technical data: * Form of the crimping element: hexahedral * Size of the crimping element: 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70mm 2 * Section of the crimping conductors: - AI conductors - from 4 to 70mm 2 - Cu conductors – from 4 to 70 mm 2 * Element pressing power: 8T * Width of the element: 10mm * Weight of the instrument: 2.8 kg * Length: 310mm * Used hydraulic oil: Shell Tellus T15 * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder HYDRAULIC PIERCING INSTRUMENTS Hydraulic piercing pliers TPA - 8 type

Catalogue number: 54000

Functions: * Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary motion Technical data: * Piercing head turning at 360° * Form of the cutting element: round * Size of the cutting element: Ø 22, 27.5, 34.3, 40, 49, 60.8mm * Piercing capacity: - sheet metal 3mm – openings up to Ø 30mm - sheet metal 2mm – openings up to Ø 60mm * Element pressing power: 80kN * Thickness of the element: 25mm * Weight of the instrument: 3.5 kg * Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15) * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder * Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands – Ø16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display devices 46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally); Catalogue number 54002

L3 Hydraulic piercing press SYK – 15 type

Catalogue number: 54001

Functions: * Cutting through openings in sheet metal with gauge up to 3mm without rotary motion Technical data: * Protracting piercing head supplied with a hose for the hydraulic oil that gives possibility for piercing openings everywhere on the metal surface * Form of the cutting element: - round - square * Size of the cutting element: - square: 32x32mm - round openings: Ø 22, 27.5, 34.3, 40, 49, 60.8mm * Piercing capacity: - sheet metal 3mm – openings up to Ø 60.8mm - sheet metal 2mm – openings up to Ø 115.5mm - square opening up to 110x110mm * Element pressing power: 15T * Thickness of the element: 25mm * Weight of the instrument: 11.5 kg * Used hydraulic oil: #15 (hydraulic oil with viscosity 15) * Metal box for the instrument * A set of congestion hoops for the hydraulic cylinder * Additional set of cutting elements for cable glands – Ø16, 20, 26.2, 32.5, 39, 51, 63 and a square for display devices 46.5x46.5, 68x68 (ordered additionally); Catalogue number 54002

Instruments Mechanical cutting instruments

140

www.elmarkgroup.eu Mechanical cable cutting pliers CC – 325 type

Catalogue number: 59305

Functions: * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors * Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core Technical data: * Maximum section of the cable: - for aluminum conductors up to 150mm 2 - for copper conductors up to 150mm 2 * Cutting power: 15T * Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet * Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism * Weight of the instrument: 0.58kg * Length of the instrument: 260mm * Package: blister

Mechanical cable cutting pliers CC – 400 type

Catalogue number: 59304

Functions: * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors * Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core Technical data: * Maximum section of the cable: - for aluminum conductors up to 400mm 2 - for copper conductors up to 350mm 2 * Cutting power: 15T * Presence of cutting mechanism type ratchet * Presence of brake of the cutting mechanism * Weight of the instrument: 1.25kg * Length of the instrument: 360mm * Package: blister

Mechanical cable cutting pliers HS – 250 type

Catalogue number: 59306

Functions: * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors * Cutting of conductors with metal bearing core Technical data: * Maximum section of the cable: - for aluminum conductors up to 240mm 2 - for copper conductors up to 185mm 2 * Weight of the instrument: 1.43kg * Length of the instrument: 540mm * Package: blister

MANUAL INSTRUMENTS Instrument for conductor stripping HS – 2103 type

Catalogue number: 59310

Functions: * Cleaning of the plastic insulation of conductors and conductors * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors up to 6mm 2 * Cutting of bearing steel plated wires up to 2mm 2 * Crimping of cable terminals Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of automobile high voltage conductors * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm 2 * Maximum section of the cable: up to 6mm 2 * Weight of the instrument: 0.21kg * Length of the instrument: 213mm * Package: blister

Instruments Hand instruments

141

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Instrument for conductor stripping HS – 2603 type

Catalogue number: 59311

Functions: * Cleaning of the plastic insulation of conductors and conductors * Cutting of aluminum or copper cable conductors up to 6mm2 * Cutting of bearing steel plated wires up to 2mm2 * Crimping of cable terminals Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors up to 6mm2 * Maximum section of the cable: - cleaning of a rigid conductor: from 0.5 to 6mm2 - cleaning of a flexible conductor: from 0.75 to 6mm2 * Presence of openings for cutting of bolts: from M2.5 to M5 * Weight of the instrument: 0.32kg * Length of the instrument: 240mm * Package: blister

Hand Crimping Tool Type LAS-005

Catalogue number: 59313

Features: · Crimping of non-insulated and insulated cable end sleeves and terminals · Allows changing of crimping dies: three different combinations possible · Safe and reliable gear-ratchet deign Technical Specifications: · Crimping range for insulated cable end sleeves and terminals – 10 mm2 · Crimping range for non-insulated cable end sleeves and terminals – 10 mm2 · Crimping die shape: hex shaped · Tool weight: 0.55 kg · Tool length: 220 mm

Instrument for manual crimping of conductors SN – 003 type Functions: * Crimping of naked cable terminals and joining bushes Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors from 6 to 16mm2 * Form of the crimping head: hexahedral * Weight of the instrument: 0.39kg * Length of the instrument: 190mm * Package: blister Catalogue number: 59309

Instrument for manual crimping of conductors HY –200R type Functions: * Used for cleaning and crimping of 4, 6, and 8 core telephone or grid conductors * Crimping of terminals/couplings for telephone or computer grids Technical data: * Possibility for crimping of cable conductors for 4, 6 or 8 cores * Weight of the instrument: 0.55kg * Length of the instrument: 200mm * Package: blister Catalogue number: 59312

Consumatives Accessories

142

www.elmarkgroup.eu Exhaust Fan APB10 – 1/232

Cat.№ 5017

The exhaust fan APB10 – 1/232 can evacuate bad smells and exhaust gases, decrease the excessive humidity and adjust indoor temperature. It is intended for use in hotel rooms, bathrooms, kitchens and other premises having special requirements to the quality of indoor atmosphere. It is made of fireproof plastic and has a decorative safety grill that widens the scope of possible applications. The exhaust fan is a wall mounted type. ·Rated voltage: 230 V ·Rated motor power: 230W ·Fan air delivery: 320 m3/h ·Mounting diameter: ø100 mm

Bell - SIGMA design Used for sound signalization in housing and industrial buildings. * Sound level: 70 dB Consumption: -3.6VA for power supply 8 -12V -5VA for power supply 230V * Mounting on DIN-rail Type

Un (V)

Catalogue number

bell

8-12 230

5012 5220

Plug for mounting on DIN rail Plug German type type for Din rail mounting. It provides plug presence in electric boards and easy cabling. * Supply voltage: 230V * Computing option: up to 16А * Operation temperature: from -10 up to +40°С * Humidity: up to 85%RH Mounting method: * DIN rail

М1

Cat.№ 37004

Bell transformer Modified for power supply of bells and other signal devices with alternating voltage 8V, 12V, 24V and capacity up to 3.8A. * The voltage of the primary winding voltage is 230V * Mounting on DIN-rail

Cat.№ 5001

Consumatives Voltage transformers

www.elmarkgroup.eu EVT5 - xxx main transformer Functions: It reduces main voltage within standard range * separates the galvanic power supply circuit from the operation circuit Technical features: * Input voltage: 400 or 230 V * Output voltage: See the table below * Frequency : 50/60Hz * Short circuit resistance: unstable * Temperature class: В (130ºC) * Construction: open (to be installed in other products) * Magnetic circuit: cold rolled electric furnace steel * Coils: pure electric copper * Protection degree: IP00 Connection: * flexible or hard conductors of relevant section to terminals Mounting: * Mounting in distribution boards or products * fastening: by means of screws/bolts to the surface * position: vertical * ambient temperature: -20 ÷+40ºС

Documents corresponding to the product: Standard EN 60051-1

143

d F C тип

Initial voltage (V)

Secondary voltage (V)

Power VA

Dimensions C

Catalogue number

EVT5 - 160VA

230

48-36

160

100

110

45248

EVT5 - 160VA

400

48-36

160

100

110

45448

EVT5 - 160VA

230

24-12

160

100

110

45243

EVT5 - 160VA

400

24-12

160

100

110

45443

EVT5 - 250VA

230

48-36

250

130

100

120

130

45242

EVT5 - 250VA

400

48-36

250

130

100

120

130

45442

EVT5 - 250VA

230

24-12

250

130

100

120

130

45244

EVT5 - 250VA

400

24-12

250

130

100

120

130

45444

EVT5 - 500VA

230

48-36

500

150

113

133

140

45245

EVT5 - 500VA

400

48-36

500

150

113

133

140

45445

EVT5 - 500VA

230

24-12

500

150

125

133

140

45246

EVT5 - 500VA

400

24-12

500

150

125

133

140

45446

EVT5 - 500VA

230

110-48-24

500

150

125

133

140

45215

EVT5 - 500VA

400

110-48-24

500

150

125

133

140

45415

EVT5 -1000VA

230

48-36

1000

170

125

150

155

45241

EVT5 - 1000VA

400

48-36

1000

170

125

150

155

45441

EVT5 - 1000VA

230

24-12

1000

170

125

150

155

45247

EVT5 - 1000VA

400

24-12

1000

170

125

150

155

45447

EVT5 - 1600VA

230

48-36

1600

190

125

150

170

452416

EVT5 - 1600VA

400

48-36

1600

190

125

150

170

454416

EVT5 - 1600VA

230

24-12

1600

190

125

150

170

452417

EVT5 - 1600VA

400

24-12

1600

190

125

150

170

454417

М2

Consumatives 89 Auxiliary devices for circuit breakers

144

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Power supply busbar Functions: -enables the supply of a group of conductors -provides simultaneous supply -conducting section – electrotechnical copper -insulation of the conducting section Technical data: * Rated operating voltage: 230/400V * Isolating voltage: 500V * Abnormal heating wear resistance and fire of the outer parts: 960°С/3sec. * Rated current (phase): 63/100A Connecting: * to the joining terminal of the breaker Type (copper busbar)

М3

Length (m)

Poles (number)

In with one point of power supply

In with two points of power supply

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

1P 63

63А

90А

14163

10 / 100

1P 100

100A

120A

14190

10 / 100

2P 63

63A

90A

14263

8 / 50

3P 63

63А

90А

14363

6 / 30

3P 100

100A

120A

14390

5 / 20

DP 1N

C100 1P

63A

90A

14463

8 / 48

125A

150A

14190T

5 / 20

C100 2P

125A

150A

14290T

5 / 20

C100 3P

125A

159A

14390T

5 / 20 10 / 100

U 1P 63

63A

90A

14163U

U 2P 63

63A

90A

14263U

8 / 50

U 3P 63

63A

90A

14263U

6 / 30

U 4P 63

63A

90A

14463U

5 / 20

Mounting (DIN) rail Functions: -serves for mounting breakers, residual current devices, contactors and other elements -provides a firm clamp of the elements Technical data: * brass alloy with galvanic cover * factory drilled mounting openings * length up to 1m Connecting: - with bolts or other fixing elements to the mounting surface Length (m)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

14001

20 / 100

Isolated mounting terminal for circuit breakers Functions: - provides a firm joining of rigid or flexible conductors up to 35mm2 to power supply busbar - provides a firm joining of the power supply conductor to the breaker - provides enough contact surface of the conductor Technical data: * Brass alloy with galvanic cover * Fabric isolated with plastic cover * Appropriate for joining to copper or aluminum cables * Rated voltage: 230V * Rated current: up to 63A * Isolating voltage: ≥500V * IP code: IP>20 * Section of power supply conductor: up to 35mm2 Connecting: * to the joining terminal of the breaker

Type

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Rated current In (A)

Catalogue number

Package / Box (pcs)

TB 25

2.5 to 35

31025

20/500

Consumatives Non-insulated butt terminals

145

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Terminal Extensions Straight copper electro-tinned extensions enabling cable connection outside the switch terminals and providing excellent contact with the switch terminal base. Terminal extensions with different cross section are available depending on the switch rated power. Mounting: Extensions are directly bolt mounted to the switch terminal base. Type

Rated current (А)

Catalogue number

Package (pcs.)

ТP 125 TP 160 TP 250 TP 400 TP 630

125 160 250 400 630

31125 31160 31250 31400 31630

6 6 6 6 6

Non-insulated butt terminals – with coating for crimping They are copper pipe with galvanic tin coating. They are used for joining of copper conductors – rigid or multiple conductors with different section. The connection is accomplished through crimping pliers, through mechanical pressing of the butt terminals and the conductor. Technical data: * Material: copper alloy * Coating: tin * Application: general Standard: EN 61 238-1

Type

Length L (mm)

Outer diameter D (mm)

Inner diameter d (mm)

Cable (mm2)

Catalogue number

GTY-4 GTY-6 1P 63 GTY-10 1P 100 GTY-16 2P 63 GTY-25 GTY-35 3P 63 GTY-50 3P 100 GTY-70 DP 1N GTY-95 GTY-120 GTY-150 GTY-185 GTY-240

20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80

5 5.3 6.3 7.5 9 10.8 12.5 14.5 17 19 21 23 26

3 3.7 4.5 5.7 7.2 8.5 9.8 11.5 13.7 15 16.7 18.5 21

4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 240

59213 59201 59202 59203 59204 59205 59206 59207 59208 59209 59210 59211 59212

Bimetal non-insulated butt terminals – with coating for crimping

М4

They are pipe made of two metals – copper and aluminum without galvanic coating. They are designed for joining copper and aluminum conductors – rigid or multiple conductors with different section. The connection is accomplished through crimping pliers, through mechanical pressing of the butt terminals and the conductor. They are used for protection against electrochemical corrosion got at two metals contact with different chemical properties and conductivity at electrical current feed. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period.

Standard: EN 61 238-1

Technical data: * Material: copper aluminum alloy * Coating: none * Application: general for joining of two types of conductors

Butt terminal type

Catalogue number

GTL - 1- 16 GTL - 1- 25 GTL - 1- 35 GTL - 1- 50 GTL - 1- 70 GTL - 1- 95 GTL - 1- 120 GTL - 1- 150 GTL - 1- 185 GTL - 1- 240

5 6 7 8.5 9.5 11.5 13.5 15 17 19

9 10 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 26

6 7 8.5 9.8 11.5 13.5 15 17 18.5 21

10 12 14 16 18 21 23 25 27 30

30 30 30 32 38 40 42 44 46 54

30 33 40 42 50 50 55 55 60 60

75 82 90 95 105 110 112 118 125 130

59214 59215 59216 59217 59218 59219 59220 59221 59222 59223

Consumatives Non-insulated terminals

146

www.elmarkgroup.eu Non-insulated cable terminals with coating for crimping SC & JM

They are used for joining copper conductors - multiple conductors with different section to electrical devices or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in terminals and safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is increased and the possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper alloy with galvanic tin coating. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. Two types are offered with standard length SC and extended base JM. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period.

JM Standard: EN 61 238-1

Technical data: * Material: copper alloy * Coating: tin * Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices. Bimetal non-insulated cable terminals for crimping DTL They are used for joining aluminum conductors - multiple conductors with different section to electrical devices or connections to combine all cores of the conductor, to provide safe connection at tightening in terminals and safe connection at the base of the terminal. Thus the connection stability against vibrations is increased and the possibility for short circuit is decreased. They are made of copper and aluminum alloys as in the aluminum billet is made under special technology the copper terminal formed like an ear. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period.

Standard: EN 61 238-1

Technical data: * Material: copper aluminum * Application: general for joining conductors to electrical devices.

Dimensions: Non-insulated cable terminals for crimping

лю5

Dimensions: Bimetal non-insulated cable terminals for crimping

Shoe type

d1 (mm)

D (mm)

d2 (mm)

L (mm)

Catalogue number

Shoe type

d1 (mm)

D (mm)

d2 (mm)

L (mm)

l (mm)

B (mm)

Catalogue number

JM - 2.5/6 JM - 4/6 JM - 6/6 JM - 6/8 Jлю - 10/6 JM - 10/8 JM - 16/6 JM - 16/8 JM - 16/10 JM - 25/8 JM - 25/10 JM - 35/8 SC - 35/8 JM - 35/10 SC - 35/10 JM - 35/12 SC - 35/12 JM - 50/8 SC- 50/8 JM - 50/10 SC - 50/10 JM - 50/12 SC - 50/12 JM - 70/10 SC - 70/10 JM - 70/12 JM - 95/10 JM - 95/12 SC - 95/12 JM - 120/10 JM - 120/12 JM - 150/12 SC - 150/12 JM - 185/12 JM - 185/16 JM - 240/16 SC - 240/16

2.2 3.0 3.8 3.8 4.8 4.8 5.5 5.5 5.5 7 7 8.2 8.1 8.2 8.1 8.2 8.1 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8 9.8 11.5 11.5 11.5 13.8 13.8 13.8 15.5 15.5 16.5 16.5 18.8 18.8 21.3 21.3

4.5 4.8 5.5 5.5 6.8 6.8 7.5 7.5 7.5 9 9 10.5 10.3 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.3 12.5 12.3 12.5 12.3 12.5 12.3 14.5 14.3 14.5 17.5 17.5 16.7 19.5 19.5 21 21 23.5 23.5 26.5 26.1

6 6 6 8 6 8 6 8 10 8 10 8 8 10 10 12 12 8 8 10 10 12 12 10 10 12 10 12 12 10 12 12 12 12 16 16 16

24 24 24 24 25.5 25.5 30.5 30.5 30.5 34 34 38 36 38 36 38 37 45 43 45 43 45 43 50 48 50 55.5 55.5 55 63 63 71 67 78 78 92 85

59240 59241 59035 59059 59036 59037 59038 59039 59040 59041 59042 59043 59043S 59044 59044S 59045 59045S 59046 59046S 59047 59047S 59048 59048S 59049 59049S 59050 59051 59052 59052S 59053 59054 59055 59055S 59056 59057 59058 59058S

DTL - 16 DTL - 25 DTL - 35 DTL - 50 DTL - 70 DTL - 95 DTL - 120 DTL - 150 DTL - 185 DTL - 240

6 7 8.5 9.8 11.5 13.5 15 16.5 18.5 21

11 12 14 16 18 21 23 25 27 30

8 8 10 10 12 12 14 14 16 16

70 75 85 90 102 112 120 126 133 140

30 34 38 40 48 50 53 56 58 60

16 18 20.5 23 26 28 30 34 37 40

59224 59225 59226 59227 59228 59229 59230 59231 59232 59233

Consumatives Insulated terminals

147

www.elmarkgroup.eu Insulated butt connectors They are cable butt terminal with cross section up to 6mm2 with polyvinylchloride insulation. They are used for joining/extending multiple conductors with section up to 6mm2. It increases the connection stability against vibrations and decreases the possibility for short circuit. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and conductor. The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period. Technical data: * Material: copper alloy * Coating: polyvinylchloride * Application: general for joining copper conductors

Standard: EN 61 238-1 Color

Red

Blue

Yellow

Length (mm)

Package (pcs.)

100

Type number

PVT 1.25

BV 1.25

PVT 2

BV 2

PVT 5.5

BV 5.5

Conductor (mm2)

1.5-2.5

4-6

Catalogue number

59015

59001

59034

59002

59014

59003

Insulated cable terminals They represent a cable terminal made of brass alloy with galvanic tin coating and insulated with polyvinylchloride. They are used as non-insulated terminals, as the insulated part protects the cores from bending and breaking in the joining point and at the same time it protects the staff from direct contact to the current leading elements. They are used for connectors with section up to 6mm. The connection is realized through crimping pliers, through mechanic pressing of the terminal and cable. The different insulation colour corresponds to different conductor sections. They are manufactured under modern technology and have high quality and long exploitation period. All insulated cable terminals are being offered in 100 pcs. packing Technical data: * Material: copper alloy * Coating: polyvinylchloride * Application: general for joining copper conductors * Ambient temperature: -10 to +75°C MALE

MDD - red 1.25 - 187

MDD - red 1.25 - 250

MDD - blue 2 - 187

MDD - blue 2 - 250

MDD - yellow 5.5 - 250

Catalogue number

59012

59009

59013

59011

59010

FEMALE

FDD - red 1.25 - 187

FDD - red 1.25 - 250

FDD - blue 2 - 187

FDD - blue 2 - 250

FDD - yellow 5.5 - 250

Shoe width

187

250

187

250

Conductor (mm2)

1.5-2.5

4-6

Catalogue number

59008

59006

59007

59004

59005

М6

Colour

white

blue

red

black

grey

orange

green

dark green

milky yellow

black

greyyellow

Type

Е0508

Е7508

Е1008

Е1510

Е2512

Е4012

Е6018

Е10-18

Е16-18

Е25-16

Е35-25

4.0

6.0

59029

59030

59031

Terminal length (mm)

Conductor (mm2)

0.5

0.75

1.0

1.5

2.5

Catalogue number

59023

59024

59025

59026

59027

Colour

59028

25 59032

35 59033

yellow

blue

red

Type

RVL 1.25-4

RVL 1.25-5

RVL 2-4

RVL 2-5

RVL 5.5-4

RV 5.5-5

RV 5.5-6

Package (pcs.)

100

Size of the opening (mm)

Conductor (mm2)

1.5-2.5

4-6

Catalogue number

59021

59022

59018

59019

59020

59016

59017

Consumatives Insulated terminals

148

www.elmarkgroup.eu

лю6

MALE

PTV - red 1.25 - 10

PTV - red1.25 - 12

PTV - blue 2 - 10

PTV - blue 2 - 12

PTV - yellow 5.5 - 13

Shoe width

1.9

2.9

Conductor (mm2)

0.25-1.5

0.25-2.5

1.5-2.5

4-6

Catalogue number

59101

59102

59103

59104

59105

MALE

PBDD - red 1.25 - 250

PBDD - blue 2 - 250

PBDD - yellow 5.5 - 250

Shoe width

6.3

Conductor (mm2)

0.25-1.5

1.5-2.5

4-6

Catalogue number

59106

59107

59108

MALE

MPD - red 1.25 - 156

MPD - blue 2 - 195

MPD - yellow 5.5 - 195

Shoe width

6.3

Conductor (mm2)

0.25-1.5

1.5-2.5

4-6

Catalogue number

59109

59110

59111

MALE

MDFN - red 1.25 - 250

MDFN - blue 2 - 250

MDFN - yellow 5 - 250

Shoe width

Conductor (mm2)

0.25-1.5

1.5-2.5

4-6

Catalogue number

59112

59113

59114

Length (mm)

18.1

20.1

25.5

27.3

Package (pcs.)

100

Type number

CHS3

CHS4

CHS5

CHS6

Conductor (mm2)

0.25-1.5

1.5-2.5

4-6

Catalogue number

59115

59116

59117

59118

Consumatives Consumatives

149

www.elmarkgroup.eu Cable glands PG type They are designed to provide the IP code IP at conductors passing through the walls of the electrical distribution boxes. They represent a plastic pipe supplied with the corresponding gaskets and nuts. All cable gland elements are made of high quality plastic (PE) or rubber.

Standard: EN 60 423; 4858-81

Technical data: * Material: polyethylene (PE) * Colour: gray * Application: general * Ambient temperature: -40 to +85°C * IP code: IP 55

Cable gland type

PG-7 PG-9 PG-11 PG-13.5 PG-16 PG-19 PG-21 PG-24 PG-29 PG-36 PG-42 PG-48

Overlapping field

Т (mm)

B (mm)

d (mm)

D (mm)

L1 (mm)

L2 (mm)

Catalogue number

3.5-6.8 5-8 6-10 7-12 8-14 9-17 10-18 15-22 16-24 18-28 26-362 32-39

16.3 18.9 21.7 23.6 26.5 29 32.3 32.6 41.1 52 57.4 65.2

18 21.7 23.5 26.5 29.3 32 35.6 32.6 45.4 58 61.9 70.7

12 15.5 18.5 20 21.5 23 28 29.8 36 46 51 58

6.6 8.5 10.4 13 14 17 19 24 26 31.5 37.6 43

10 10 8.5 10 9 12 12 13 12.5 12.5 17.5 21

22 25 29 29 29 29 35 31 40 45 47 50

500070 500090 500110 500135 500160 500190 500210 500240 500290 500360 500420 500480

Zero rails They represent a brass rail with rectangular section with fabric made openings for the conductors and bolts for clamping of the conductor. They are offered in types with insulated and non-insulated rail. They are used in the electrical distribution boxes for zeroing and earthing. Technical data: * Material: brass for the current leading elements * Insulation material: plastic * Colour: gray/blue * Application: general * Ambient temperature: -40 to +85°C

М7

Zero rails Rail type

Lenght L (mm)

Height H (mm)

Widht W (mm)

Ø D (mm)

Bolt

Number of terminals

Catalogue number

BRASS

1000

7.8

М4

14002

ZERO insulated

250

М4

14012

Catalogue number

5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10 5x10

14204 14206 14208 14210 14212 14304 14306 14308 14310 14312

Zero terminals SP 031

SP 029

Rail type

SP 029-4 SP 029-6 SP 029-8 SP 029-10 SP 029-12 SP 031-4 SP 031-6 SP 031-8 SP 031-10 SP 031-12

82.9.4 100.9 118.9 136.9 182.4 59.5 76.5 93 111 128

21.5 21.5 21.5 21.5 21.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5

12 12 12 12 12 12.4 12.4 12.4 12.4 12.4

70.5 88.5 106.5 124.5 170 48.5 65.5 82 100 117

ØD

6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5

Consumatives Consumatives

150

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Plastic corrugated conduit The plastic corrugated conduits are designed for protection of wires and Conduits are made of thin-wall plastic and are available in different sizes.

Type

Internal Diameter Ø (mm)

Catalogue number

IMG 9 IMG 13 IMG 16 IMG 19 IMG 23 IMG 29

9.0 13.5 16.0 19.0 23.0 29.0

500G09 500G13 500G16 500G19 500G23 500G29

Insulating PVC tape with dimensions 0.15mm / 19mm / 20y Colour

black

white

Опаковка (бр.)

Каталожен номер

51001

51005

red

blue

yellow/green

51002

51006

51004

Clips for cable fixing Type

М7

CHR-4

Ф Catalogue number

CHR-5

500004

CHR-6

CHR-7

500005

500006

500007

CHR-8

CHR-9

500008

500009

CHR-10

CHR-12

500010

CHR-14

CHR-16

500012

500014

500016

Cable ties Length (mm)

100

150

160

200

250

280

300

370

380

450

500

Width (mm)

2.5

3.5

4.8

3.5

4.8

7.9

Catalogue № 500100 white Catalogue № black

500152 500162 500202 500253 500283 500303 500304 500373 500384 500454 500507 500151 500161

500251 500281 500301

500501

Consumatives Thermal shrinkable tubes

151

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Thermal shrinkable tubes ZDG type The thin wall thermal shrinkable tubes are used for cable connections insulation, at conductors repair to protect the cable head from corrosion, for protection of the cable insulation from water and moisture, for restoring the cable insulation integrity, etc. It is a plastic thin wall pipe which at temperature higher than 120°C shrinks its initial diameter to a certain degree. The material has high temperature and UV rays wear resistance. The material represents the so called permanently netted plastic. This material is obtained as the plastic billet is processed with the help of high energy electron rays so that inner molecular bonds between adjacent molecules are formed. After that the pipe is heated to the boiling point, the pipe inflates, so do the inner molecular bonds. Then the pipe is sharply refrigerated and the molecules stay in the condition of inflated bonds for indefinite long time. Heating the pipe repeatedly (after being mounted to the given cable) the crystals melt again but due to the net structure, they resume the initial pipe diameter and take the form of the cable, pressing it and not allowing the moisture to get under the pipe. Standard: EN 60 684 Technical data: * Material: threefold netted polyene * Colours: blue, black, red, yellow, yellow-green, green, white * Contraction degree: min 2 : 1 * Ambient temperature: -40 to + 100°C * Contraction temperature: min 120°C * Flame wear resistance: burns faintly * It does not liberate harmful substances * Insulation resistance: 1х 10 1 2 Ω/cm * Application: general * Insulating voltage 1000 V

D1 (mm)

D2 (mm)

S (mm)

Quantity (m)

Catalogue number * blue, red, black, green, yellow, yellow-green

1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 20 22 25 28 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 150

0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 9.0 10 11 12.5 14 15 16.5 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 75

0.04 0.04 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08

200 200 200 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

301001x 301115x 301002x 301003x 301004x 301005x 301006x 301007x 301008x 301009x 301010x 301011x 301012x 301013x 301014x 301015x 301016x 301018x 301020x 301022x 301025x 301028x 301030x 301035x 301040x 301050x 301060x 301070x 301080x 301090x 301100x 301120x 301150x

Note: * At orders after the catalogue number of the corresponding diameter a letter showing the colour must be added: B – blue; R – red; K - black; G - green; Y – yellow; V – yellow-green

М8

Consumatives Terminal blocks

152

www.elmarkgroup.eu Fixed terminal blocks LTU2 UK series Series fixed terminal blocks with universal application in electrical distribution boxes. For DIN-rail mounting. Variety of sizes for optimum using of the space in the distribution boxes through selection of appropriate terminals for the corresponding conductors. Made of non-flammable insulating polymeric material.

Standard: IEC - 60947-7-1

Section of the conductor (mm2)

0.2-2.5 42.5 47

5.2

single-core multiple-core

0.2-4

Size of the terminal (mm) L

".. 6"

Section of the conductor (mm2) single-core multiple-core

0.2-6

0.2-4

Size of the terminal (mm) L

42.5

М9

0.2-10

6.2

Size of the terminal (mm) H

8.2

".. 8"

single-core multiple-core

0.5-16 0.5-10

Catalogue number

800

grey red black blue

LTU2UK 3N LTU2UK 3N LTU2UK 3N LTU2UK 3N

31033 31032 31031 31035

In (А)

Un (V)

Color

Type number

Catalogue number

800

grey red black blue

LTU2UK 5N LTU2UK 5N LTU2UK 5N LTU2UK 5N

31053 31052 31051 31055

In (А)

Un (V)

Color

Type number

Catalogue number

800

grey red black blue

LTU2UK 6N LTU2UK 6N LTU2UK 6N LTU2UK 6N

31063 31062 31061 31065

In (А)

Un (V)

Color

Type number

Catalogue number

800

LTU2UK 10N LTU2UK 10N LTU2UK 10N LTU2UK 10N

31103 31102 31101 31105

Type number

Catalogue number

10mm

Size of the terminal (mm) L

42.5

10.2

".. 10"

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Type number

8mm

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Color

0.2-6 42.5

single-core multiple-core

Un (V)

8mm

".. 6"

Section of the conductor (mm2)

In (А)

grey red black blue

12mm

Size of the terminal (mm)

Un (V)

Color

2.5-25

4-16

42.5

12.2

101

800

grey

LTU2UIK 16

31163

10-35

15.2

125

800

grey

LTU2UIK 35

31353

single-core multiple-core

".. 10"

In (А)

12mm

".. 10"

16mm

Consumatives Terminal blocks

153

www.elmarkgroup.eu JD series Series double-sided insulated fixed terminal blocks designed to connect earthing conductors. Two-colour insulation (yellow and green). Made of non-flammable insulating polymeric material. Type number

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Size of the terminal (mm) L

едножилен многожилен

Standard: IEC - 60947-7-1

In (А)

Un (V)

Colour

Catalogue number

5JD

0.2-4

42.5

6.2

800

yellow-green

31054

6JD

0.2-10

0.2-6

42.5

8.2

800

yellow-green

31064

10JD

0.5-10

0.5-6

42.5

8.2

800

yellow-green

31104

16JD

2.5-25

2.5-16 42.5

12.2

108

800

yellow-green

31164

35JD

2.5-35

2.5-35 42.5

135

800

yellow-green

31354

".. 10"

16mm

Accessories for fixed terminal blocks – marking tags ZB type Accessories for marking and separation of different electrical circuits, voltage and fixing of elements for DIN-rail mounting. Type number

Number of tags in a strip

ZB6

ZB8

Color

Size (mm)

Catalogue number

white

31906

white

31908

Catalogue number

End cover Type number

Color

Thickness (mm)

grey

1.5

Type number

Number of terminals

31901

Гребени Catalogue number

FBI

FBI - 3

FBI

FBI - 10

FBI - 2

М9

Fixing terminal E/UK type Type number

Color

Thickness (mm)

Catalogue number

Е/UK

grey

31902

Terminal blocks TBH type Type number

Number of tags in a strip

In (А)

Un (V)

Colour

Section of the conductor (mm2)

Catalogue number

TBH 3A

660

femi - transparen

tо 1.5

31003

TBH 6A

660

femi - transparen

tо 4

31006

TBH 10A

660

femi - transparen

tо 6

31010

TBH 15A

660

white

tо 6

31015

TBH 20A

660

white

tо 10

31020

Consumatives Multiplugs and cable reels

154

www.elmarkgroup.eu MAK-2A with thermal protection Model

Package (pcs)

Cable specification

Cable length

Catalogue number

H05VV-F

3 x 1.5mm2

10m

47911

MAK-3 with thermal protection Package (pcs)

Cable specification

H05VV-F

Model

Cable length

Catalogue number

3 x 1.5mm2

20m

47921

3 x 1.5mm2

25m

47925

Model

Package (pcs)

Cable specification

Cable length

Catalogue number

H05VV-F

3 x 1.5mm2

25m

47927

H05VV-F

3 x 1.5mm2

40m

47940

H05VV-F

50m

47950

Cable specification

Cable length

Catalogue number

MAK-4 with thermal protection

3 x 1.5mm

лю10 Cable reel with damp-proof sockets type MAK-10A Model

Package (pcs)

HJR - 10AP

3 x 1.5mm2

25m

47970

HJR - 10P

3 x 1.5mm2

50m

47971

Cable length

Catalogue number

Cable reel with industrial plug and socket type MAK-10 Model

Package (pcs)

Cable specification

HJR - 102A

3 x 1.5mm2

25m

47972

HJR - 103A

3 x 1.5mm2

30m

47973

Consumatives Multiplugs and cable reels

155

www.elmarkgroup.eu DG - D03B / DG - D04B Model

Package (pcs)

H05VV-F (DG-D03B) H05VV-F (DG-D03B) H05VV-F (DG-D03B) H05VV-F (DG-D04B) H05VV-F (DG-D04B) H05VV-F (DG-D04B) Max.3500W,16/250~

50 40 40 50 40 40

Cable specification

3 x 1.0mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.0mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2

Cable length

Catalogue number

1.5m 3.0m 5.0m 1.5m 3.0m 5.0m

47031 47080 47081 47041 47082 47083

Cable length

Catalogue number

1.5m 3.0m 5.0m 1.5m 3.0m 5.0m

47051 47053 47055 47061 47063 47065

Cable length

Catalogue number

1.5m 3.0m 5.0m 1.5m 3.0m 5.0m

47974 47975 47976 47977 47978 47979

DG - D05B / DG - D06B Model

Package (pcs)

H05VV-F (DG-D05B) H05VV-F (DG-D05B) H05VV-F (DG-D05B) H05VV-F (DG-D06B) H05VV-F (DG-D06B) H05VV-F (DG-D06B) Max.3500W,16/250~

50 40 40 50 40 40

Cable specification

3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2

Child-safety extension sockets with LED switch types HKX-3 / HKX 4 Model

Package (pcs)

HKX - 3N HKX - 3N HKX - 3N HKX - 4N HKX - 4N HKX - 4N Max.3500W,16/250~

50 40 40 50 40 40

Cable specification

3 x 1.0mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.0mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2

лю10 DG - D03B / DG - D04B Model

Package (pcs)

Cable specification

HKX - 5N HKX - 5N HKX - 5N HKX - 6N HKX - 6N HKX - 6N Max.3500W,16/250~

50 40 40 50 40 40

3 x 1.0mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.0mm2 3 x 1.5mm2 3 x 1.5mm2

Package (pcs)

Cable specification

Cable length

1.5m 3.0m 5.0m 1.5m 3.0m 5.0m

Catalogue number

47980 47981 47982 47983 47984 47985

ODL - PYX Model

ODL - PY - 05

ODL - PYX - 2E

GES - 008

3 x 1.5mm 3 x 1.5mm -

Cable length

Catalogue number

1.5m

47986

1.5m

47987

47988

Electrical switches and sockets "RHYME”

156

10A

Scheme 1 button 1 way switch 1 button 2 way switch

White metallic

10A

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme metallic (pcs) (pcs)

11011

11021

1 button 1 way switch 1 button 2 way switch

11012

11022

10A

Scheme 2 buttons 1 way switch

White metallic

11041

Scheme

White metallic

dimmer

11191

2 buttons 1 way switch

11042

White metallic

door bell

11181

door bell 11181В with sign push 11181C button

2 buttons 1 way switch

dimmer

11192

door bell with sign push 11182C button

11182

1 button 1 way switch 1 button 2 way switch

11016

11026

11023

Gold metallic

11043

Package Scheme (pcs)

dimmer

Gold metallic

11193

2 buttons 1 way switch

door bell

11183

door bell with sign push 11183C button

dimmer

Grey metallic

11024

11046

2 buttons 1 way switch

Coffee metallic

11196

door bell

door bell with sign push button

Coffee metallic

11186

dimmer

11186C

11015

11025

10A

Grey metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

11044

2 buttons 1 way switch

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

11045

Grey metallic

11194

600W

Package Scheme (pcs)

dimmer

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

11195

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

Package (pcs)

600W

Package Scheme (pcs)

1 button 1 way switch 1 button 2 way switch

Graphite metallic

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

11014

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

1 button 1 way switch 1 button 2 way switch

Coffee metallic

10A

Gold metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

600W

Package Scheme (pcs)

10A

600W

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme (pcs) (pcs) metallic door bell

Coffee metallic

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

11013

600W

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme (pcs) (pcs) metallic

10A

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme (pcs) (pcs) metallic

10A

Scheme

1 button 1 way switch 1 button 2 way switch

Gold metallic

10A

600W

10A

door bell

Grey metallic

11184

door bell 11184В with sign push 11184C button

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

door bell

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

11185

door bell with sign push 11185C button

Electrical switches and sockets "RHYMEâ&#x20AC;? 16A

Scheme German type socket French type socket

16A

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme (pcs) (pcs) metallic

11211

11212

11211F

11212F

White metallic

Phone socket

11261

German type socket French type socket

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme (pcs) (pcs) metallic

Phone socket

11281

Computer socket

11251

Scheme

White metallic

Insert key power switch

www.elmarkgroup.eu

White metallic

Scheme

Computer socket

157

Phone socket

11282

Computer socket

11252

11262

Package Scheme Champagne Package Scheme (pcs) (pcs) metallic Insert key power switch

11331

Panel

White metallic

Package (pcs)

Double

11551

Double

11552

Triple

11661

Triple

11662

11332

Panel Champagne Package (pcs) metallic

Insert key power switch

Gold metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

11213

11213F

Gold metallic

16A

German type socket French type socket

Package Scheme (pcs)

Phone socket

11283

Computer socket

11253

11263

Gold metallic

11333

Package Scheme (pcs)

Insert key power switch

Package Panel (pcs)

Coffee metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

11216

11216F

Coffee metallic

German type socket French type socket

Package Scheme (pcs)

Phone socket

11286

Computer socket

11256

11266

Coffee metallic

Package Scheme (pcs)

11336

Insert key power switch

16A

Package Scheme (pcs)

11214

11214F

Grey metallic

German type socket French type socket

Package Scheme (pcs)

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

11215

11215F

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

Phone socket

11265

11284

Computer socket

11285

11254

11255

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

11335

11264

Grey metallic

Package Scheme (pcs) Insert key power switch

11334

Grey metallic

Package (pcs)

Panel

Graphite metallic

Package (pcs)

Panel

Gold metallic

Double

11553

Double

11556

Double

11554

Double

11555

Triple

11663

Triple

11666

Triple

11664

Triple

11665

Coffee metallic

Package Panel (pcs)

Grey metallic

Електрически ключове и контакти Панели "SPLENDOR"

158

www.elmarkgroup.eu Colour

WHITE

Type

single

single with cover

double

triple

Catalogue №

06301

0629

06311

06321

Package(pcs)

Colour

CHROME single

double

triple

Catalogue №

063010

063110

063210

Package(pcs)

Type

Colour

SILVER GRAY

Type

single

double

triple

Catalogue №

06302

06312

06322

Package(pcs)

Colour

YELLOW

Type

single

double

triple

Catalogue №

06304

06314

06324

Package(pcs)

PEAR-TREE

Colour Type

single

double

triple

Catalogue №

06305

06315

06325

Package(pcs)

Colour

GOLDEN single

double

triple

Catalogue №

063011

063111

063211

Package(pcs)

Type

Colour

BORDO

Type

single

double

triple

Catalogue №

06307

06317

06327

Package(pcs)

CHERRY-TREE

Colour

Type

single

double

triple

Catalogue №

06306

06316

06326

Package(pcs)

BLACK

Colour Type

single

single with cover

double

triple

Catalogue №

06303

1629

06313

06323

Package(pcs)

ORANGE

Colour

single

double

triple

Catalogue №

063012

063112

063212

Package(pcs)

Type

Colour

LIGHT BLUE

Type

single

double

triple

Catalogue №

06308

06318

06328

Package(pcs)

DARK BLUE

Colour Type

single

double

triple

Catalogue №

06309

06319

06329

Package(pcs)

Electrical switches and sockets Functional part “SPLENDOR”

159

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Type

Rated current In (A)

Colour

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

one button one way switch

10 10

cross switch

0601 1601 0602 1602 0603 1603

one button two way switch

white dark gray white dark gray white dark gray

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

Type

two buttons one way switch two buttons one way switch with light / two buttons two way switch

Rated current In (A)

10 10

Type

Rated current In (A)

German type socket

French type socket

German type socket (double)

Type

Rated current In (A)

one button one way switch with light

one button two way switch with light

Type

Rated current In (A)

Push light button

Door bell switch

Type

Power (W)

Dimmer switch

350

Fan speed switch

500

Type

ТV

Colour

white dark gray white dark gray Colour

white dark gray white dark gray white dark gray Colour

white dark gray white dark gray Colour

RG 11

white dark gray Colour

Type

Phone socket Phone socket double Computer socket

RG 45

Type

Rated current In (A)

Insert key power switch

white dark gray white dark gray white dark gray Colour

white dark gray

0610 1610 0612 / 0611 1612 / 1611 Catalogue number

0616 1616 0616F 1616F 0616D 1616D Catalogue number

0606 1606 0607 1607

10 10

10 10 Package (pcs)

10 10 10 Package (pcs)

10 10

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

0605 1605 0609 1609

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

0618 1618 0619 1619

10 10

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

0621 1621

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

0623 1623 06232 16232 0624 1624

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

0633 1633

10 10

Electrical switches and sockets "BASIC"

160

www.elmarkgroup.eu 10A

Scheme

White

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

Beige (crème)

Package Scheme (pcs)

1 button 1 way switch Tg101 1 button 2 way switch TG102

38001

38002

38011

1 button 1 way switch Tg101 1 button 2 way switch TG102

38012

cross switch TG115

38071

cross switch TG115

38072

1 button 1 way switch with light TG114

38701

1 button 1 way switch with light TG114

38702

1 button 1 way switch Tg101 1 button 2 way switch TG102

38000

38010

cross switch TG115

38070

1 button 1 way switch with light TG114

38700

10A

Scheme 2 button 1 way switch Tg103

White

38050

Package Scheme (pcs)

Scheme

White

dimmer

38800

TG111

2 button 1 way switch Tg103

Package Scheme (pcs)

38051

2 button 1 way switch Tg103

White

push button

38100

TG112A door bell

TG112

38120

Silver gray

38052

400W

Package Scheme (pcs) dimmer 10

TG111

Beige (crème)

38801

Beige (crème)

push button

38101

door bell

TG112A TG112

38121

Package Scheme Graphite (pcs) dark gray

38003

38013

cross switch TG115

38073

1 button 1 way switch with light TG114

38703

Package Scheme (pcs) dimmer 10

TG111

Silver gray

38802

2 button 1 way switch Tg103

38053

Package Scheme Graphite (pcs) dark gray dimmer 38803 10

TG111

push button

door bell

TG112A TG112

Silver gray

38102 38122

push button

door bell

TG112A TG112

38103 38123

Package (pcs)

38005

38015

cross switch TG115

38075

1 button 1 way switch with light TG114

38705

10 10

cross switch TG115

38074

1 button 1 way switch with light TG114

38704

10A

Package Scheme (pcs) 2 button 1 way switch Tg103

Blue

38054

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

2 button 1 way switch Tg103

38055

400W

Package Scheme (pcs) dimmer 10

TG111

Blue

38804

10A

Package Scheme Graphite (pcs) dark gray

Tree (Pear)

1 button 1 way switch Tg101 1 button 2 way switch TG102

38014

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

38004

400W

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

Blue

1 button 1 way switch Tg101 1 button 2 way switch TG102

10A

Package Scheme Graphite (pcs) dark gray

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

1 button 1 way switch Tg101 1 button 2 way switch TG102

400W

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

10A

Beige (crème)

10A

Scheme

Silver gray

10A

400W

10A

400W

Package Scheme (pcs) dimmer 10

TG111

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

38805

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

push button

door bell

TG112A TG112

Blue

38104 38124

10A

Package Scheme (pcs)

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

push button

38105

door bell

38125

TG112A TG112

Electrical switches and sockets "BASIC" 16A

Scheme Ger.type

White

38250 TZ107C with cover

French type

Ger.type

TZ101 Ger.type double

TZ115

Scheme

tel. TZ106

comp. TZ112

Scheme

38200F 38200D

White

38350 38300

White

Ger.type

TZ107 Ger.type

TZ107C

Beige (crème)

French type

TZ101 Ger.type double

TZ115

Package Scheme (pcs)

10 10

tel.

Tz106

comp. TZ112

Package Scheme (pcs)

Panel

White

Package (pcs)

Double

38900

Triple

38910

16A

Package Scheme (pcs)

38201

38251

with cover

38360

TZ111

www.elmarkgroup.eu 16A

Package Scheme (pcs)

38200

TZ107

161

Ger.type

TZ107 Ger.type

TZ107C

Silver gray

38201D

Beige (crème)

38351 38301

Beige (crème)

10 10

French type

TZ101 Ger.type double

TZ115

Package Scheme (pcs)

10 10

tel.

TZ106

comp. TZ112

Package Scheme (pcs)

Ger.type

Blue

Package Scheme (pcs) Ger.type

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

38203

38204

38205

38253 TZ107C with cover

38254 TZ107C with cover

38255 TZ107C with cover

38202F

French type

38205F

38205D

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

38355

38305

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

38365

Tree (Pear)

Package (pcs)

38202D

Silver gray

38352 38302

TZ107 Ger.type

TZ101 Ger.type double

TZ115

38203F 38203D

Package Scheme Graphite dark gray (pcs)

10 10

tel.

TZ106

comp. TZ112

38353 38303

Silver gray

Package Scheme Graphite (pcs) dark gray

38362

Silver gray

Package (pcs)

Panel

Beige (crème)

Package (pcs)

Double

38901

Double

38902

Triple

38911

Triple

38912

Panel

Package Scheme (pcs)

16A

38252

TZ111

Ger.type

16A

38202

38361

TZ111

Package Scheme Graphite (pcs) dark gray

with cover

38201F

16A

TZ107 Ger.type

TZ101 Ger.type double

TZ115

Package Scheme (pcs)

10 10

tel.

TZ106

comp. TZ112

Package Scheme (pcs)

38204F 38204D

Blue

38354 38304

Blue

TZ107 Ger.type

TZ101 Ger.type double

TZ115

Package Scheme (pcs)

10 10

tel.

TZ106

comp. TZ112

Package Scheme (pcs)

38363

Panel

Graphite dark gray

Package (pcs)

Panel

Blue

Double

38903

Double

38904

Double

38905

Triple

38913

Triple

38914

Triple

38915

TZ111

38364

TV TZ111

Package Panel (pcs)

Electrical switches and sockets Panels and frames "LIFE STYLE”

162

www.elmarkgroup.eu PANELS

Colour Type

single

WHITE double triple

quadruple

sixfold

Catalogue №

34601

34613

34625

34637

34660

Package(pcs)

CHROME

Colour Type

single

double

triple

quadruple

sixfold

Catalogue №

34609

34621

34633

34645

Package(pcs)

SILVER GRAY

Colour Type

single

double

triple

quadruple

sixfold

Catalogue №

34610

34622

34634

34646

34662

Package(pcs)

YELLOW

Colour

Catalogue №

24262

24201

24202

Package (pcs)

Type

single

double

triple

quadruple

sixfold

Catalogue №

34602

34614

34626

34638

Package(pcs)

Type

single

double

triple

quadruple

sixfold

Catalogue №

34611

34623

34635

34647

Package(pcs)

Type

single

double

GOLDEN triple

quadruple

sixfold

Catalogue №

34608

34620

34632

34644

Package(pcs)

Type

single

double

triple

quadruple

sixfold

Catalogue №

34606

34618

34630

34642

Console

Package(pcs)

Catalogue №

Colour

* Single switch or socket use triple frame

BORDO

Package (pcs) Type

single

CHERRY-TREE double triple quadruple

Catalogue №

34162

34624

34636

34648

Package(pcs)

Type

single

double

Catalogue №

34607

34619

34631

34643

34661

Package(pcs)

Type

single

double

GREEN triple

quadruple

sixfold

Catalogue №

34603

34615

34627

34639

Package(pcs)

Type

single

double

triple

quadruple

sixfold-

Catalogue №

34605

34617

34629

34641

Colour

DARK GRAY triple quadruple

sixfold

Console box for bricks and concrete triple quadruple sixfold 24203 71304 68206 10

Console box for hollow-wall triple quadruple 24205 24206 10

* Single, double or triple swich or socket use triple console

sixfold

LIGHT BLUE

Colour

Package(pcs)

24206F

PEAR-TREE

Colour

double triple quadruple sixfold

Frame

triple

quadruple

Catalogue №

2702

2703

2704

Package (pcs)

Box

DARK BLUE

Colour

Surface mounting box double

Type

single

double

triple

quadruple

sixfold

Catalogue №

34604

34616

34628

34640

Package(pcs)

Watertight box triple

quadruple sixfold

22451А 22461А 10

22471А 10

Electrical switches and sockets Functional part â&#x20AC;&#x153;LIFE STYLEâ&#x20AC;?

163

www.elmarkgroup.eu Type

Rated current In (A)

one button one way switch

cross switch

Type

Rated current In (A)

one button two way switch one button two way switch with light Type

door bell switch with light push button with light

16 16 Rated current In (A)

10 10

Type

Rated current In (A)

curtain switch

Type

Power (W)

dimmer switch

500

fan speed switch

500

Type

Power (VA)

bell 230V

Type

Rated current In (A)

German type socket French type socket

16 16

Type

Rated current In (A)

Italian standard multi socket

RG 11

Satellite socet

Colour

white dark gray white dark gray Colour

white dark gray

Colour

white dark gray white dark gray Colour

white dark gray

Colour

white dark gray white dark gray Colour

white dark gray

white dark gray white dark gray Colour

Type

phone socket computer socket

RG 45

Type

Rated current In (A)

decorative switch

white dark gray white dark gray

Colour

Type

TV antenna socket

Colour

white dark gray white dark gray Colour

white dark gray

Catalogue number

20501 21501 20579 21579 Catalogue number

20506 21506 20507 21507 Catalogue number

20510A 21510A 20510B 21510B

Package (pcs)

4 4 Package (pcs)

4 4

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

20521 21521

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

20803 21803 20803A 21803A

8 8

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

20616 21616

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

20265 21265 20265F 21265F

4 4

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

20203 21203

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

20228 21228 30301 31301 Catalogue number

20251 21251 20266 21266

4 4 Package (pcs)

4 4

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

20056 21056

Electrical switches and sockets "HAKANâ&#x20AC;?

164

www.elmarkgroup.eu Type

one button one way switch SR - 2503

Rated current In (A)

Type

Rated current In (A)

white

380601 380602 380603 380604 380605 380606 380607 380608

silver gray creme wenge silver gray creme wenge Color

Catalogue number

white

380701 380702 380703 380704 380705 380706 380707 380708

silver gray creme wenge

white

two button one way switch with light SR - 2502

Type

Rated current In (A)

one button two way switch SR - 2510

Type

Rated current In (A)

German type socket SR - 2506

Catalogue number

white

one button one way switch with light SR - 2501

two button one way switch SR - 2504

Color

silver gray creme wenge

Type

Rated current In (A)

dimer SR - 2513

Type

TV SR - 2508

Rated current In (A)

Type

Push light button SR - 2514

Rated current In (A)

white

380711 380712 380713 380714

Color

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

white

380801 380802 380803 380804 380805 380806 380807 380808 380809 380810 380811 380812

Color

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

white

380830 380831 380832 380833

Color

Catalogue number

Package (pcs)

white

380813 380814 380815 380816 380817 380818 380819 380820

silver gray creme wenge

silver gray creme wenge silver gray creme wenge silver gray creme wenge

silver gray creme wenge

silver gray creme wenge silver gray creme wenge Color

Catalogue number

white

380821 380822 380823 380824 380825 380826 380827 380828

silver gray creme wenge

white Door bell switch SR - 2509

Package (pcs)

white phone SR - 2516

Catalogue number

white German type socket double SR - 2512

Color

white German type socketŃ with cover SR - 2516

Package (pcs)

silver gray creme wenge

Package (pcs)

Consumatives Consumatives

167

www.elmarkgroup.eu Cable tags – sets TYPE

Section (mm)

EC-0-0 EC-0-1 EC-0-2 EC-0-3 EC-0-4 EC-0-5 EC-0-6 EC-0-7 EC-0-8 EC-0-9

1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2

TYPE

Section (mm)

EC-1-0 EC-1-1 EC-1-2 EC-1-3 EC-1-4 EC-1-5 EC-1-6 EC-1-7 EC-1-8 EC-1-9

2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2

TYPE

Section (mm)

EC-2-0 EC-2-1 EC-2-2 EC-2-3 EC-2-4 EC-2-5 EC-2-6 EC-2-7 EC-2-8 EC-2-9

3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2

TYPE

Section (mm)

EC-3-0 EC-3-1 EC-3-2 EC-3-3 EC-3-4 EC-3-5 EC-3-6 EC-3-7 EC-3-8 EC-3-9

5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2

Number in a roller Catalogue number

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

318000 318001 318002 318003 318004 318005 318006 318007 318008 318009

Number in a roller Catalogue number

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

318010 318011 318012 318013 318014 318015 318016 318017 318018 318019

Number in a roller Catalogue number

500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500

318020 318021 318022 318023 318024 318025 318026 318027 318028 318029

Number in a roller Catalogue number

250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250

318030 318031 318032 318033 318034 318035 318036 318037 318038 318039

TYPE

Section (mm)

EC-0-a EC-0-b EC-0-R EC-0-S EC-0-T EC-0-N EC-0-P EC-0-Е EC-0-А EC-0-B EC-0-C EC-0-Q

1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2 1.5 - 3.2

TYPE

Section (mm)

EC-1-a EC-1-b EC-1-R EC-1-S EC-1-T EC-1-N EC-1-P EC-1-Е EC-1-А EC-1-B EC-1-C EC-1-Q

2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2 2.6 - 4.2

TYPE

Section (mm)

EC-2-a EC-2-b EC-2-R EC-2-S EC-2-T EC-2-N EC-2-P EC-2-Е EC-2-А EC-2-B EC-2-C EC-2-C

3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2 3.6 - 5.2

TYPE

Section (mm)

EC-3-a EC-3-b EC-3-R EC-3-S EC-3-T EC-3-N EC-3-P EC-3-Е EC-3-А EC-3-B EC-3-C EC-3-Q

5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2 5 - 7.2

Number in a roller Catalogue number

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

31800a 31800b 31800R 31800S 31800T 31800N 31800P 31800E 31800A 31800B 31800C 31800Q

Number in a roller Catalogue number

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

31801a 31801b 31801R 31801S 31801T 31801N 31801P 31801E 31801A 31801B 31801C 31801Q

Number in a roller Catalogue number

500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500

31802a 31802b 31802R 31802S 31802T 31802N 31802P 31802E 31802A 31802B 31802C 31802Q

Number in a roller Catalogue number

250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250

31803a 31803b 31803R 31803S 31803T 31803N 31803P 31803E 31803A 31803B 31803C 31803Q

М8

ELMARK sample boards in business centers

166

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Board 1

Board 3

Board 2

Board switches

ELMARKâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s participation in technical exhibitions

Hannover Messe 2008, Germany

Paris 2008, France

167

www.elmarkgroup.eu

Service and maintenance

168

www.elmarkgroup.eu

ELMARK HOLDING SC offers wide range of services to answer the clientâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirements completely and thoroughly. In order to improve the service quality ELMARK HOLDING has opened:

E-mail: support@elmarkholding.eu; tel. +359 52 575 500; fax +359 52 575 501 to receive claims, advice, questions and orders for services. * ELMARK HOLDING SC provides guarantee and post-guarantee maintenance to all products. * Repair or replacement of damaged devices in guarantee or post-guarantee period. * Each letter could be sent in the language preferred by the client. * The guarantee of the products is valid at adherence to the specifications for mounting and exploitation. ELMARK HOLDING SC has started engineering services as well. * Making of boards at clientâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s documentation projects. * Appurtenances mounting in industrial projects. * Recommendation for modernization and reconstruction of outdated devices. * Choice of suitable current leakage protection in order to improve the safety of the staff. * Defining the power supply voltage quality and the consumed capacity. * Harmonic analysis of the power supply voltage and studying the possibilities for failure lessening. Calculating smoothing filters. * Capacity factor measuring and calculating the necessary capacitor batteries. Cutting down the energy losses and improving the quality of the supplied electrical energy. To connect the engineering department you can refer to:

e-mail: engineering@elmarkholding.eu or phone +359 89 666 88 01, fax +359 58 66 25 25

ELMARK HOLDING SC BULGARIA, VARNA ZPZ, 10 Perla Str. Tel. +359 52 57 55 00 Fax +359 52 57 55 01 E-mail: offce@elmarkholding.eu

ELMARK FACTORY IN EUROPE

GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR BULGARIA ELMARK GROUP - BULGARIA LTD BULGARIA, VARNA ZPZ, 10 Perla Str. Tel. +359 52 57 55 55 Fax +359 52 57 55 80 E-mail: offcevarna@elmarkgroup.eu BULGARIA, SOFIA 160 Geo Milev Blvd. Tel./Fax +359 2 971 15 60 / 61 E-mail: offcesofa@elmarkgroup.eu

ELMARK INDUSTRIES SC BULGARIA, DOBRICH 2 Dobrudja Blvd. Tel./Fax +359 58 66 25 25 E-mail: elmarkfactory@elmarkholding.eu

BULGARIA, PLOVDIV 180 Brezovsko Shose, warehouse No. 25 Tel./Fax +359 32 968 210 E-mail: offceplovdiv@elmarkgroup.eu

GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR ROMANIA

GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR GREECE

ELMARK GRUP SRL ROMANIA, BUCHAREST 8 Bucuresti Urziceni Str. Tel. +40 21 351 54 81 / 82 Fax +40 21 351 54 83 E-mail: offcebucharest@elmarkgroup.eu

ANASTASIADI S.A. GREECE, THESSALONIKI 4, G. Drossini Str., Kordelio Tel. +30 2310 700250 Fax +30 2310 707577 E-mail: central@anastasiadi.gr

GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR SERBIA

GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR CYPRUS

ELMARK GROUP DOO SERBIA, KRAGUJEVAC 4 Drage Todorovich Str. Tel. +381 34 311 777 Fax +381 34 311 778 E-mail: offcekragujevac@elmarkgroup.eu SERBIA, BELGRADE Zemun - Altina 45 Ugrinovachki put Str. Mobile +381 63 401 426 Tel./Fax +381 11 316 39 50 E-mail: offcebelgrade@elmarkgroup.eu GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR CROATIA ELMARK GROUP DOO CROATIA, Zagreb Mobile: ++385 95 924 29 93 Fax: ++385 1 557 19 23 E-mail: offcezagreb@elmarkgroup.eu GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR HUNGARY ELEKTRO PROFI COMMERCIAL LTD. HUNGARY, BUDAPEST 3 Albertirsai Str. Tel. +36 1 460 61 40 Fax +36 1 460 61 41 E-mail: kereskedelem@elektroprof.hu GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR JORDAN SOFIA IMPORT&EXPORT EST. JORDAN, AMMAN SHAFA BARDAN - ASP UNIVERSITY CIRCLE PRINCE TATAL BIN MOHAMMAD STR. Tel. +962 7 77 749649 Fax +962 6 53 38589 E-mail: waleed_qudah@yahoo.com GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR SRI LANKA ATTOTECH SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (PVT) LTD. SRI LANKA, BALLUMMAHARA, Mudungoda, No: 72, Kandy Road Tel. +943 34 674 803 Fax +943 34 674 802 E-mail: general.inquiries@attotech.lk

HLEKTRAPOTHIKI L.T.D. CYPRUS, PAFOS 3, Kalamatas Str. Tel. +357 26 937 726 GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR BOSNA I HERCEGOVINA STANEX DOO BOSNA I HERCEGOVINA, ZENICA 17 KRALJA TVRTKA I Str. Tel. +387 32 444 040 / 050 / 060 E-mail: stanex@telekabel.ba ELIM DOO BOSNA I HERCEGOVINA, LAKTAŠI Shushniaari Str. Tel. +387 51 586 000 Fax +387 51 586 060 E-mail: elimdoo@blic.net GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR MONTENEGRO TRGOTEHNA DOO MONTENEGRO, NIKSHICH 10 Zarka Zrenjanina Str. Tel./Fax +381 83 246 056 E-mail: trgotehna@cg.yu GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR MACEDONIA PIT KOM DOOEL MACEDONIA, NEGOTINO 120 Dame Gruev Str. Tel. +389 43 370 287 Fax +389 43 370 282 E-mail: pitcom@mt.net.mk GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR ISRAEL TAMHASH LTD ISRAEL, RISHON LE ZION 21 Moshe Sharet St., P.O.B 5038 75151 Tel. +972 3 9611288 Fax +972 3 9616270 / 5747 E-mail: offce@tamhash.co.il GENERAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR ITALY GPTECNO Italy,Torino 10134, VIA ALBENGA, 20 , Tel: +39 011-3173202 Fax +39 011-3172149 E-mail: info@gptecno.it